2017 Cherokee

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®

17KL74-126-AB
2017
OWNER’S MANUAL
Cherokee
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Second Edition
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Printed in U.S.A.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA features and equipment that are either standard or op-
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this
accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
portation. factured.

WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
1

2 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3

4 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 4

5 SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 5

6 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 7

8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 8

9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 9
10 MULTIMEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 10
11 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 11
12 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 12
 INTRODUCTION 1

CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 ▫ Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .7
▫ Essential Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision.
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC ve-
Refer to “Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for
hicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
further information.
distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
perform tasks that are not intended for conventional pas-
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
senger cars. It handles and maneuvers differently from
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
many passenger cars, both on-road and off-road, so take
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
drive vehicle.
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s remain with the vehicle when sold.
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission,
dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained
and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles
technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve
your satisfaction.
with experience. When driving off-road, or working the
vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle, or expect the vehicle to ROLLOVER WARNING
overcome the natural laws of physics.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
Always observe federal, state, provincial, and local laws than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
wherever you drive. ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
 INTRODUCTION 5
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. 1
manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the government notes that the universal use of existing seat
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
may roll over while some other vehicles may not. each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle con-
belt. Always buckle up.
trol. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Drive carefully.
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Rollover Warning Label
Owner’s Manual:
6 INTRODUCTION
 INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily WARNING!
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
CONTENTS
䡵 FRONT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 䡵 INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
䡵 REAR VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
FRONT VIEW

Front View
1 — Hood/Engine Compartment 4 — Wheels/Tires
2 — Windshield 5 — Exterior Mirrors
3 — Daytime Running Lights 6 — Doors
 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
REAR VIEW

Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
12 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Panel
1 — Air Vents 4 — Instrument Cluster
2 — Multifunction Lever 5 — Windshield Wiper Lever
3 — Steering Wheel 6 — Glove Compartment
 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 13
INTERIOR

Interior Features
1 — Power Window Switches 4 — Climate Controls
2 — Seats 5 — Switch Panel
3 — Transmission Gear Selector 6 — Uconnect Radio
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS 3
䡵 KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation
— If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Vehicle On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .27
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ How To Use Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .32
▫ Remote Start Abort Message On The Instrument
Cluster Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
䡵 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .29
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 ▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .55
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . . . . . . . .35 䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .56
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — ▫ Electrochromic Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . .60
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats . . . . . . . .52 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Rear Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
䡵 STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 ▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . .62
▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .55 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 ▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 ▫ Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped . . . . . .70
▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .64 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
3
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 ▫ Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If ▫ Manual Climate Control Without A Touchscreen
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 ▫ Climate Controls With A Touchscreen . . . . . . . . .79
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . .66
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Ambient Light Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Power Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Dome Light Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Interior Light Defeat (Off). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection . . . .93
▫ Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) . . . . .67
▫ Reset Auto-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . .67
▫ Window Lockout Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF ▫ Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .103
▫ Opening Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . . . .103
▫ Closing Sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . . .106
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Opening Power Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Closing Power Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
䡵 HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Opening The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Closing The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped . . . . . . . .118
▫ Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .120
▫ Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
KEYS NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
(RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system.
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE 3
The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature.
switch.
Key Fob
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66ft (20m)
using a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
• This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
• The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
RUN will illuminate. Key Fob
1 — Liftgate Button 4 — Remote Start Button
2 — Unlock Button 5 — PANIC Button
3 — Lock Button
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Doors” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Key Fob With Emergency Key
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
1 — Emergency Key
doors and liftgate.
2 — Key Fob
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate acknowledge the signal. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
located in “Multimedia” for further programmable infor-
Push the interior door unlock button on the door panel.
mation.
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Doors”
unlock all doors and the liftgate.
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automatically
3
if the key is left inside the passenger compartment, other-
wise the doors will stay locked.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See Remove The Emergency Key
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate 1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Emergency Key Removal Separating Case With A Coin

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
Request For Additional Key Fobs 3
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.

WARNING!
Battery Replacement • Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
solid surface such as a table or similar, and then replace Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign the OFF mode.
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
that has never been programmed.
rubbing alcohol.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
together.
dealer.
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information NOTE: If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: switch.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the START/STOP Ignition Button
passenger compartment.
The push button ignition has three operating positions. The
three positions are OFF, ACC, and RUN.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
WARNING! (Continued)
positions:
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
OFF access to an unlocked vehicle.
• The engine is stopped. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is 3
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm, etc.) could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
are still available. should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
ACC brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
• Engine is not started. a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
• Some electrical devices are available. ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
RUN
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Driving position. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
• All the electrical devices are available.
cause serious injury or death.
NOTE: The vehicle will not start if the key fob is located
inside the cargo area and the liftgate is opened. CAUTION!
WARNING! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Al-
ways remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
NOTE: For further information, refer to ⬙Starting Proce-
(Continued) dures,⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating.⬙
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicle On Message
WARNING! (Continued)
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind access to an unlocked vehicle.
you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition to • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
the chime, the Vehicle On message will display in the dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
cluster. could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
NOTE: The power window switches and power sunroof (if should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
equipped) will remain active for three minutes after the brake pedal or the gear selector.
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
programmable. ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
WARNING! power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, cause serious injury or death.
place the engine in the OFF position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If
CAUTION!
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make
sure the keyless ignition is in “OFF” position, re- An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Al-
move the key fob from the vehicle and lock the ways remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
vehicle. doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

(Continued)
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • The vehicle must be started with the key after two
consecutive timeouts.
This system uses the key fob to start the engine All of the following conditions must be met before the
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still engine will remote start:
maintaining security. The system has a range of 3
• Gear selector in PARK
approximately 328ft (100m).
• Doors closed
NOTE:
• Hood closed
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start. • Liftgate closed
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may • Hazard switch off
reduce this range.
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
How To Use Remote Start
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Push remote start button on the key fob twice within five
• Check engine light shall not be present
seconds. Pushing the remote start button a third time
shuts the engine off. • PANIC button not pushed
• To drive the vehicle, push unlock button, insert the key • System not disabled from previous remote start event
in the ignition and turn to the ON/RUN position.
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the
ON/RUN position. • Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• Vehicle Security Alarm is not signaling an intrusion
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
WARNING!
The message will stay active until the ignition is turned to
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or the ON/RUN position.
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon To Enter Remote Start Mode
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury Push and release the remote start button on the key fob
or death when inhaled. twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle
controls could cause serious injury or death. will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
Remote Start Abort Message On The Instrument NOTE:
Cluster Display — If Equipped
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
The following messages will display in the instrument vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
remote start prematurely:
Remote Start mode.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Open
the key fob. However, the ignition must be cycled by
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset pushing the START/STOP button twice (or the ignition
switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position) before
• Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Active — Insert Key and Turn To Run” will show in the
Vehicle instrument cluster display until you insert the key.
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow • For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle. Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start Active
— Push Start Button” will will show in the instrument 3
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
cluster display until you push the START button.
disable with a one time push of the remote start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request. Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
disarm the vehicle security alarm (if equipped). Then, prior feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is
to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the activated. These features will stay on through the duration
START/STOP button. If the START/STOP button is not of remote start or until the ignition switch is cycled to the
present, insert the key fob into the ignition switch and turn ON/RUN position.
the switch to the ON/RUN position. Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation
— If Equipped
NOTE:
When remote start is active and the outside ambient
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C), the Windshield Wiper
— Passive Entry feature, the ignition switch must be in
De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting remote start will resume
the ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
previous operation, except if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and opera-
— Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start tion will continue.
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
tion. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. used to start the engine.

2. This device must accept any interference received, in- After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera- the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
tion. a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
by the party responsible for compliance could void the indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
user’s authority to operate the equipment. engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
SENTRY KEY
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
authorized dealer.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
CAUTION!
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of is one that has never been programmed.
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems 3
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
and loss of security protection. bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have Customer Key Programming
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
Replacement Keys dealer.
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle General Information
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
programmed to any other vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
CAUTION! with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — 2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
the OFF position. tion.
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved To Arm The System
by the party responsible for compliance could void the Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the “OFF”
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED position.
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors, • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make sure
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition for the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release
vehicle:
are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible and • Push the lock button on the interior power door lock
visible signals: switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
• The horn will pulse Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
• The turn signals will flash exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further
• The vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will information).
flash
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
Rearming Of The System
3. If any doors are open, close them.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
To Disarm The System
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
after approximately 90 seconds, and then the vehicle The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
security alarm will rearm itself. the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive En- door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
try⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further vehicle security alarm.
information). If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
3
• Place the vehicle ignition system in the OFF position. becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
NOTE: lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on disarm the vehicle security alarm.
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security Security System Manual Override
alarm.
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power doors using the manual door lock plunger.
liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm
the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle DOORS
through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will
Manual Door Locks
sound.
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
trim panel forward until the lock indicator is shown. To
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your first detent or rotate the door lock button until the lock
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the indicator is hidden. To unlock the rear doors, rotate the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden.
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the door lock button is locked (lock indicator visible)
WARNING! (Continued)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
closing the door. access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
liftgate. fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
WARNING! selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
N-Go — Ignition the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
could operate power windows, other controls, or
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped
move the vehicle.
with Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, Power Door Locks
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may The power door lock switches are located on each front
cause severe personal injuries or death. door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.

(Continued)
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi-
cle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door without 3
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.

Power Door Lock Switch • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the keys are
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
found inside the car when door lock button on trim is used
response time.
to lock the door. At the third attempt, the doors will lock
even if the key is inside • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
ACC or ON/RUN and the driver’s door is open, the doors if equipped will arm the security alarm.
will not lock. To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside the With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft (1.5m) of the
vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may be driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlocked manually by raising the lock knob. unlock the driver’s door automatically.
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s in any passive entry vehicle:
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st • A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect while a door is open.
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
while a door is open.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft (1.5m) of the
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
the door is open.
handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automati-
cally.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock all
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built
Passive Entry key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and into the electronic liftgate release.
alert the customer.
3
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the follow-
ing conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into
liftgate handle release. With a valid Passive Entry key fob Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location
within 5ft (1.5m) of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
release to open with one fluid motion.
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5ft
To Lock The Liftgate (1.5m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft (1.5m) of the the Passive Entry lock button located on the outside door
liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located to the handle.
right of liftgate handle release.
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect System,
the key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent
Locking of Passive Entry key fob in Vehicle⬙ remains
active/functional.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
battery is dead. The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock power door locks if:
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled. 3
General Information
2. All doors are closed.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: 3. The transmission gear selector was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). 4. Any door is opened.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
Protection Door Lock system.
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion. To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is
by the party responsible for compliance could void the engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
user’s authority to operate the equipment. outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate the
door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden
(unlocked position), roll down the window, and open
the door with the outside door handle.

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged (locked).

SEATS
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE: Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can be
opened only by using the outside door handle even WARNING!
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
tem, always test the door from the inside to make certain
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
it is in the desired position.
killed.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
always test the door from the inside to make certain it is vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
in the desired position.
(Continued)
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
WARNING! (Continued)
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
likely to be seriously injured or killed. move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and seat adjusters have latched. 3
using a seat belt properly.

Manual Seats — If Equipped

WARNING!

Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar control which could cause a collision and serious
is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Front Seat Adjustment

42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull
upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.

Recline Lever

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
Seat Height Adjustment a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard Power Seats — If Equipped
side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s seat.
release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of
forward and release the lever. the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the seat up,
down, forward or rearward.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat
switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. 3

Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward

The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.

Power Seat Switch

Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached. Power Seat Recliner Switch
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or de-
crease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or Power Lumbar Switch
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support. 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be
sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned
forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45

WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously 3
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

Rear Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment — If

Equipped Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the seat To Lower The Rear Seat
near the floor and release it when the seat is at the desired
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper outer
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
edge of the seat or pull the pull strap located on the
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
middle outer edge of the seat.
latched.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Raise The Rear Seat
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty return-
ing the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.

WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
Rear Seatback Release Lever And Pull Strap latched seat could cause serious injury.
2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.
Recliner Adjustment
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply comfort. Pull on the pull strap while sitting in the rear seat
placing the seats to the open position, over time the seat to recline the seatback.
cushion will return to its normal shape.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of desired radio
station presets.
The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door
panel. The switch contains three buttons, a set (S) button to 3
activate the memory save function, memory button (1) and
memory button (2). The memory switch allows the driver
to recall either of the two pre-programmed memory pro-
files by pushing the appropriate number button on the
switch.

Rear Seat Recliner Pull Strap

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.

Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped

This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory switch. Driver Memory Switch
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming The Memory Feature NOTE:
To create a new memory profile, perform the following: • Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing
profile from memory. profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- Fob To Memory” in this section.
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory Key Fob To Memory
switch, then push memory button (1) within five sec-
Your remote keyless entry key fob can be programmed to
onds. The instrument cluster display will display which
recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles with a
memory position is being set.
push of the unlock button on the key fob.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
NOTE: Before programming your key fob you must select
memory as follows:
the “Memory To FOB” feature through the Uconnect
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position. system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets). To program your key fob, perform the following:
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory 1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
switch, then push memory button (2) within five sec-
2. Select the desired memory profile (1) or (2).
onds. The instrument cluster display will display which
memory position is being set.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer • To recall the memory settings for driver two, push
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for memory button number 2 or the unlock button on the
instructions on how to set a memory profile. key fob linked to memory position 2.
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is 3
switch, then within five seconds push and release the
button labeled (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster second will occur before another recall can be selected.
display. Easy Entry/Exit Seat
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
10 seconds. enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
NOTE: Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory vehicle.
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by pushing The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
the unlock button on the key fob within 10 seconds. have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the vehi-
Memory Position Recall cle’s ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory • When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF posi-
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in tion, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm)
PARK, a message will display in the instrument cluster rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
display. equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
• To recall the memory settings for driver one, push you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN
memory button number 1 or the unlock button on the position.
key fob linked to memory position 1.
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the • Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm) heating elements off.
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automati-
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or cally switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
Easy Entry. continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
Entry and Easy Exit position. will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/ operate.
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
“Multimedia” for further information. seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.

Front Heated Seats — If Equipped This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
The front heated seats control buttons are located within further information.
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen. WARNING!
• Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
setting on.
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
• Press the heated seat button a second time to turn spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
the LO setting on. tion or other physical condition must exercise care

(Continued)
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
• Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
WARNING! (Continued)
choose LO.
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long • Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn
periods of time. the ventilated seat OFF.
3
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. to operate.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the On models that are equipped with remote start, the venti-
seat. lated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote
start.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move further information.
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient HEAD RESTRAINTS
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal posi-
WARNING!
tion following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper- their normal position, see your authorized dealer immedi-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head ately.
restraints are placed in their proper positions in To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
of a crash. button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the downward on the head restraint.
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
cause serious injury or death in the event of a go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment
collision. button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head
of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
additional clearance to the back of your head. push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact, the RHRs will automatically extend forward mini-
mizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s head
and the RHR.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53

WARNING! (Continued)
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating 3
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.

Rear Head Restraints

Front Head Restraint
The rear outboard head restraints have three positions up,
1 — Release Button
mid and down. The center head restraint has only two
2 — Adjustment Button
positions, up and down. When the center seat is being
occupied the head restraint should be in the raised posi-
WARNING! tion. When there is no occupant in the center seat the head
restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision driver.
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re- To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
moved head restraints in a location outside the restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
occupant compartment. button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
(Continued)
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go then push the release button and the adjustment button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust the head
restraint to the appropriate height.

Center Head Restraint

1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button

WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
Outboard Head Restraint vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
1 — Release Button re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
2 — Adjustment Button vehicle or occupying a seat.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
STEERING WHEEL lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward WARNING!
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the 3
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an
average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shut-
ting off. This time will vary based on environmental
temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the
steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
WARNING!
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen. • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
• Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
the heating element ON. spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
• Press the heated steering wheel button a second time when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
to turn the heating element OFF. burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering for long periods.
wheel to operate. • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start wheel covers of any type and material. This may
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to MIRRORS
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa- Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
tion.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should on the view through the rear window.
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield). 3

Electrochromic Mirror
NOTE: The automatic dimming feature is disabled when
Adjusting Rearview Mirror the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing.
Electrochromic Mirror The automatic dimming feature can be turned on or off
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a through the touchscreen.
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
• Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the feature
The mirror installs on the windshield button with a coun-
on.
terclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting.
• Press the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature off.
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors Power Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to The power mirror switches are located on the driver’s door
center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of trim panel.
the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give
a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane
next to your vehicle.

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror. Power Mirror Switches
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Left And Right Mirror Select
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Power Folding Mirrors Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located be- You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
tween the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). following occurs:
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding. 3
the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the
normal driving position. • The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pushing the button. (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Win-
Power Folding Mirror Switch dow Features” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph further information.
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed
is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will
automatically unfold.
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Clos-
1. Fold down the sun visor.
ing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch

The headlight switch is located on the left side of

the instrument panel. This switch controls the op-
eration of the headlights, parking lights, automatic
headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights, instru-
Illuminated Vanity Mirror ment panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights —
if equipped.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
3
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after
the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in
the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to ON.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
Headlight Switch are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
“Multimedia” for further information.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Headlight Time Delay
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
vehicle in an unlit area.
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF Lights-On Reminder
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the headlight switch is turned off. when the driver’s door is opened.
NOTE: The headlight delay feature is automatically acti- Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
vated if the customer leaves the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position when the ignition is place to the OFF The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine
position. is started and remain on unless the headlamps are turned
on, the parking brake is applied, or the engine is shut OFF.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the
ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the delay. NOTE: If allowed by law, in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
turn off in the normal manner.
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
NOTE: tion.
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of Fog Lights — If Equipped
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
feature.
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering
column. 3

Fog Light Switch

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking

lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the Multifunction Lever
headlight switch. Turn Signals
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
when the fog lights are turned on. on each side of the instrument cluster display will flash to
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the lights.
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: High/Low Beam Switch
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is Flash-To-Pass
defective.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instru- lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
ment cluster display and a continuous chime will sound will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with remain on until the lever is released.
either turn signal on.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
• When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn Equipped
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn
off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
when the turn signal is turned off. ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera de-
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped tects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three out of view.
times then automatically turn off.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
NOTE: INTERIOR LIGHTS
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor- automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the 3
mation. LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to The Battery Protection also includes the glove compart-
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, ment light and the cargo light. To restore interior light
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens operation after automatic battery protection is enabled
will cause the system to function improperly. (Lights Off), either place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position or cycle the light switch.
Battery Saver Feature
Front Map/Reading Lights
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead
to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights console. Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch
were switched on manually or are on because a door is on either side of the console. To turn the lights off, push the
open. switch a second time. These lights also turn on when a door
is opened, or when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed, or when the dimmer control is turned completely
upward to the second detent.
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Front Map/Reading Light Switches Instrument Panel Dimmer

There are courtesy lights located above the front seats. The Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the lens. To Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward
turn the lights off, push the lens a second time. to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control located in the overhead console, door handle lights, under
I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby bin lights.
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the head-
light switch and is located on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted
cupholders — if equipped.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the
first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as
the odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio when
the position lights or headlights are on. 3

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steer-
ing column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information on the rear
wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in this section.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
Dome Light Position
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
The interior lights will remain on when the instrument
panel dimmer control is in this position.
Interior Light Defeat (Off)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme
bottom (O) off position. The interior lights will remain off
when the doors are open.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION! (Continued)
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low and the blades cannot return to the “park” position,
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper damage to the wiper motor may occur.
operation.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate
for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

Windshield Wiper Operation

CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the “park”

(Continued) Windshield Washer Operation

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position,
the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn
off.

WARNING! 3
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist Control
Mist
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occa-
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and auto-
sional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever up-
matically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is
ward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping
especially useful for road splash or overspray from the
cycle.
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the this feature.
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
spray the windshield with washer fluid. multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most sensi-
tive. Setting three should be used for normal rain condi-
tions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver desires
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if the driver • Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the igni-
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF tion is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the
position when not using the system. NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
NOTE:
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position. Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind- operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode.
shield. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other
may reduce Rain Sensing performance. inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information. Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the conditions:
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions: • Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of a
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate when the ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C).
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
• Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear
defrost is turned on and when the ambient temperature
is below 33° F (0.6° C).
3
• Activation By Remote Start Operation — When remote
start is active and the outside ambient temperature is
less than 33° F (0.6° C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
shall be enabled. On exiting remote start resume previ-
ous operation except, if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
timer and operation shall continue.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when Intermittent Wiper Operation
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from
a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles
(first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent).
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Window Features Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the
first detent for intermittent operation and to the
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the wind-
shield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed
column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a
switch, located at the middle of the lever. while in the intermittent setting, the wiper will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off position,
the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the lever is
released the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Rear Window Defroster
CAUTION!

The rear window defroster button is located on the Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
switch bank by the manual climate controls. Push the heating elements:
this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the • Use care when washing the inside of the rear win- 3
heated outside mirrors. An indicator in the button will dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
window defroster automatically turns off after approxi- mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
mately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
operation, push the button a second time. with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
NOTE: window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
• The Windshield Wiper De-Icer (if equipped) shall be dow.
activated automatically when the Rear Defrost is turned • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
on and when the ambient temperature is below 33
degrees F (0.6° C).
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window
defroster only when the engine is operating.
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Control Without A Touchscreen
Overview
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be
set to obtain desired interior conditions.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Manual Climate Control Without A Touchscreen Descriptions

Icon Description
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the 3
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise
from the off position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotat-
ing the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Modes Control Knob
Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode • Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
Bi-Level Mode wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Icon Description
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Floor Mode NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
Mix Mode side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77

Icon Description
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. 3

NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and
side window demist outlets. When the defrost setting is selected, the blower level will increase.
Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Economy Mode • Activation By Remote Start Operation
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn When the Remote Start is activated and the outside ambi-
off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Rotate the ent temperature is less than 33° F (0.6° C) the windshield
temperature control knob to the desired temperature. Also, wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the
make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes. climate control functions will resume their previous opera-
Stop/Start System — If Equipped tion except, if the de-icer is active, the de-icer timer and
operation will continue.
While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort. CAUTION!
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition. Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Windshield Wiper De-icer — If Equipped
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element located dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
at the base of the windshield. interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
It operates automatically once the following conditions are met: mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
• Activation By Front Defrost with warm water.
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
weather manual start with full defrost, and when the window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
ambient temperature is below 33° F (0.6° C). • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
• Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear
Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is below
33° F (0.6° C).
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Climate Controls With A Touchscreen

5.0 With Manual Temperature Controls

80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

8.4/8.4 NAV With Manual Temperature Controls

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81

5.0 With Automatic Temperature Controls

82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

8.4/8.4 NAV With Automatic Temperature Controls

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Climate Control With A Touchscreen Descriptions

Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. 3
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Per-
forming this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the
A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Icon Description
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator on the
touchscreen illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side win-
dow demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use De-
frost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the
front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons — If Equipped
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow
button on the faceplate, on the touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the
red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the down arrow
button on the faceplate, on the touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the
blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is
active, the passenger’s temperature will move up and down with the driver’s temperature.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85

Icon Description
SYNC Button — If Equipped
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indica-
tor is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger tem-
perature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature set- 3
ting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
Faceplate Knob Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to
manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the face-
Touchscreen plate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Buttons • Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Icon Description
Panel Mode • Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
Bi-Level Mode wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Floor Mode
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
Mix Mode side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
the heating elements:
needed.
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win- 3
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat- in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
with warm water. the radiator and through the condenser.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive MAX A/C
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow. MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. mance.

Climate Control Functions Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
A/C (Air Conditioning) on.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys- adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the setting and MAX A/C to exit.
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Recirculation Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, Equipped
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate Automatic Operation
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger
to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
temperature control buttons. Once the desired tempera-
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out)
ture is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
cally maintain that comfort level.
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED function automatically.
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
NOTE: Operating Tips
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
Summer Operation 3
comfort as quickly as possible.
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable fea- protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
ture. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
for further information.
Winter Operation
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
speed and transition into Auto mode. properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the air Recirculation mode during
Manual Operation Override
Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause
This system offers a full complement of manual override window fogging.
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the presence
of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be
manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vacation/Storage Outside Air Intake
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam- months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
age when the system is started again.
Cabin Air Filter
Window Fogging
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy the air. Contact your authorized dealer to service your
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De- cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Operating Tips Chart

3
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
Power Window Controls
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time
door windows. is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.

WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door Auto-Down Feature
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The driver door power window switch and the passenger
The window controls will operate only when the ignition is
door power window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Push the window switch down, for a short period of time,
and release and the window will go down automatically.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
To open the window part way, push the window switch
WARNING!
down briefly and release it when you want the window to
stop. There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
To stop the window from going all the way down during almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the 3
window path before closing.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Reset Auto-Up
Lift the window switch up, for a short period of time, and
release and the window will go up automatically. Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly. 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
To close the window part way, lift the window switch pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop. additional two seconds after the window is closed.

NOTE: 2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the

window completely and continue to hold the switch
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- down for an additional two seconds after the window is
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. fully open.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first
detent and hold to close the window manually.
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Switch POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim panel EQUIPPED
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear The power sunroof switches are located to the left between
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and the sun visors on the overhead console.
release the window lockout button (the indicator light on
the button with turn on). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn back off).

Power Sunroof Switches

The power shade switches are located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.

Window Lockout Switch

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95

WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your 3
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.

Opening Sunroof
Power Shade Switches
Express
WARNING!
A comfort stop position and full open position are the
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with programmed automatic stops for the sunroof open posi-
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key tions. The comfort stop position has been optimized to
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible minimize wind buffeting.
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
second. The sunroof will open automatically to the comfort
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
stop position (if the sunshade is in the closed position
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
when the operation is initiated the sunshade will automati-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death. cally open to the half open position prior to the sunroof
opening). Push the switch rearward and release it again,
(Continued)
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
the sunroof will open to the full open position and auto- position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
matically stop. This is called “Express Open”. During cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
switch will stop the sunroof. sunroof.
Manual Mode Manual Mode
A comfort stop position is a programmed automatic stop To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
for the sunroof open position. The comfort stop position forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting. movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will stop automatically at the comfort stop Venting Sunroof — Express
position (if the sunshade is in the closed position when the
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half second
operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically open
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
to the half open position prior to the sunroof opening).
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
Push and hold the switch rearward again, the sunroof will
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
open to the full open position and automatically stop. Any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof
and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
until the switch is pushed and held rearward again. vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
Closing Sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
Opening Power Shade position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will
close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within the switch will stop the shade.
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to 3
the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
switch a second time from the halfway position and the half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again
shade will automatically open to the full open position and will automatically close both the sunroof and shade com-
stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During pletely.
Express Open operation, any movement of the shade Manual
switch will stop the shade.
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the forward
Manual Mode position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward. The and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition
shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open until the switch is pushed again.
position. Push and hold the shade switch rearward again Pinch Protect Feature
and the shade will open automatically to the full-open
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
until the switch is pushed again.
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
Closing Power Shade curs.
Express NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
second and the shade will close automatically from any sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting HOOD
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of Opening The Hood
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver’s
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and side of the instrument panel.
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
Hood Release
turned to the OFF/LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull the safety
WARNING!
latch release lever forward (toward you). The safety
latch release lever is located behind the front edge of the Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
hood, slightly off-center to the right. vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. 3
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.

CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location

Closing The Hood
Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from
the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the
hood is completely closed.
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE liftgate release to open with one fluid motion. Push the
button on the key fob twice within five seconds to release
Opening
the liftgate.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing the elec- instrument cluster display, all doors will unlock when you
tronic liftgate release (refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — push the electronic release on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver
Passive Entry” located in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”) Door 1st Press⬙ is programmed in Uconnect, the liftgate
or by pushing the liftgate button on the key fob. Push the will unlock when you push the electronic release on the
liftgate button on the key fob twice within five seconds to liftgate. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing further information.
the button twice within five seconds a second time will
close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the front overhead
console. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be
closed by pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear
trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If the liftgate is in
motion, pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear
trim panel will reverse the liftgate.
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic

Liftgate Entry
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
NOTE: Use the power door lock switch on either front Closing
door trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate lowering the
liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors and the liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate takes over the
driver’s door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the closing effort.
liftgate. 3
NOTE: Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
NOTE: . possession of the key because the liftgate may be locked.
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an To Lock The Liftgate
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the
liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate liftgate, pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
trim panel. lock button located to the right of the outside handle
release will lock the vehicle.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the
liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power NOTE: The liftgate unlock feature is built into the elec-
liftgate functionality. tronic liftgate release.
Cargo Area Features
WARNING!
Cargo Load Floor
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passen-
(181 kg).
gers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate
closed when you are operating the vehicle. To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room. Refer to “Seats” in this
section for further information.
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Extension Panels
WARNING! (Continued)
Cargo extension panels can be folded and unfolded. When • To help protect against personal injury, passengers
the rear seats are moved to the more forward positions and should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
the rear seat backs are folded down, the extension panels cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
can be unfolded manually by hand (2 of them). The only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
extension panels can be used to extend the load floor to the use seat belts.
rear seats and/or hide the gap between the load floor and The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
rear seats, or to assist in loading large items into the cargo change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han-
area. dling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops injury, follow these guidelines for loading your ve-
hicle:
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits de-
used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
scribed on the label attached to the left door or left
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels. door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
WARNING! heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
• Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a tie-down over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come sway.
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
anchors provided for child seat tethers. the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
(Continued)
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle
on the sides of the load floor.
3

HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Console

NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Rear Storage Bins Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that before you begin programming.
operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new
unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery. battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
The HomeLink buttons, located on the overhead console, that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Training The Garage Door Opener
Programming A Rolling Code
1 — Door Opener
For programming garage door openers that were manufac- 2 — Training Button
tured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identi-
fied by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
NOTE: It is NOT the button that is normally used to open away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
and close the door. The name and color of the button may while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
vary by manufacturer.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency channels.
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to 3
Code)
rapid.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
follow these steps:
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
release the button.
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
steps.⬙
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device before 1995.
activates, programming is complete. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
the training. while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans- indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
mitter button. release the button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remain-
rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency ing steps.⬙
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid. For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and several seconds of transmission.
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
is complete and the garage door/device should acti- to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed. which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
the same manner.
erase the channels.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non- process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
Rolling Code) or gate motor.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program programming, plug it back in at this time.
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Canadian/
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button, while Gate Operator)
3
you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans- To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success- follow these steps:
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates. 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may release the button.
open and close while you are programming. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all
observe the indicator light. remaining steps.

NOTE: Using HomeLink

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
is complete and the garage door/device should acti- button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed. device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
any time.
erase the channels.
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Security
WARNING!
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle. • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all serious injury or death.
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be • Your motorized door or gate will open and close
erased. while you are programming the universal trans-
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
Vehicle Security Alarm is active. or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
Troubleshooting Tips that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
are some of the most common solutions: door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand- use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
held transmitter. tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to tance.
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and re- General Information
member to plug it back in? This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at conditions:
HomeLink.com for information or assistance. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
3
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met. Glove Compartment
There is also an additional storage bin located above the
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT instrument panel in the center of the dash.
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passengers side of
the instrument panel. Pull outward on the latch to open the
glove compartment.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Console Storage Compartment To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
Some vehicles may be equipped with a wireless charging
pad located in the upper portion of the center console.
Refer to “Wireless Charging Pad-If Equipped” in this
section for more information.

Center Console

Upper Console Charging Pad

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
The center console has a storage area which can hold cell Flip ’n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage — If
phones, PDAs, and other small items. Equipped
Some models may be equipped with storage under the
front passenger seat cushion. Pull upward on the seat
cushion loop to open the storage compartment. 3

Center Console Storage

WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart- Passenger Seat Cushion Loop
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
sion.
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,
located in the center console.

Passenger Seat Cushion Storage Compartment

NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it Front Cupholders
latches to the base.

WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into
position before using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will
not provide the proper stability for passengers. An
improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious
injury.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers,
located in the center armrest.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover
Rear Cupholders
Sun Visors Power Outlets

An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Clos- electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
ing the mirror cover will turn off the light. The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the
outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
the battery and powered at all times.
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR knob
and element must be used.

CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
Front Power Outlet
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im-
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. outlet located in the storage area of the center console.

The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on

the center stack of the instrument panel.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet has “battery” powered all the time by switching the power
power available when the ignition switch is in the ON or outlet Power Distribution Center panel fuse from fuse
ACC position. location F91 to F81.
3

Rear Power Outlet

Power Outlet Fuse Locations
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.

CAUTION!

Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse Locations • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
1 — F75 Fuse 20A Yellow Front Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter Con-
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
sole Bin
2 — F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered when the enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position) ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
3 — F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery powered at all engine from starting.
times) • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
4 — F60 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.

(Continued)
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
CAUTION! (Continued)
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long Watts. Certain high-end game consoles will exceed this
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces- power limit, as will most power tools.
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a 3
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in the
recharge the vehicle’s battery. device. The outlet automatically turns off when the device
is unplugged.
Power Inverter — If Equipped The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
Power Inverter Location • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your mobile phone in
place and an LED indicator light.
NOTE: Visit UconnectPhone.com for supported mobile
phones and compatible aftermarket sleeves.
Wireless Charging Pad Operation
To use the wireless charging pad, the coil in your mobile
phone needs to align with the coil in the charging pad,
which is located directly under the Qi logo. Since each
mobile phone’s coil location is different, you may need a
few attempts to locate the correct spot for your mobile
phone:
1. Place your mobile phone on the wireless charging pad,
Wireless Charging Pad
towards the Qi logo, so that the LED turns red. If the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless charging
LED does not turn red, pick up the mobile phone and
pad located inside the upper portion of the center console.
change the location.
This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge your Qi
enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that uses magnetic 2. Once the LED transitions from red to flashing green,
induction to transfer power to your mobile device. your mobile phone is correctly placed and charging.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless
charging, be equipped with an aftermarket sleeve or
equipped with a back plate from your mobile phone
provider, or an online or local electronics retailer.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119

Qi Logo Phone Alignment Adjustable Finger Tabs

NOTE: The mobile phone must be aligned around the Qi NOTE: The initial adjustment will only need to be done
logo for the LED to transition from red to flashing green. once as long as only one mobile phone is used. If a different
mobile phone is used, the cradle will need to be readjusted.
3. If the LED does not transition from red to flashing green,
and just turns off, pick up your mobile phone and The LED indicator will flash green while the mobile phone
reposition it on the charging pad. is charging. The Qi enabled phone is able to function
normally as it is charging.
4. Adjust the wireless charging pad mobile phone cradle to
hold the mobile phone in position. The cradle moves by
pushing down on the finger tabs and adjusting the
cradle in or out.
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed
WARNING!
on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that
Do not place metal object(s) between the mobile phone the load remains securely attached.
and wireless charging pad. Metal object(s) such as NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized dealer
coins, rings or keys will become very HOT. If metal through Mopar parts.
object(s) become lodged between the mobile phone
and wireless charging pad, carefully remove the mo- External racks do not increase the total load carrying
bile phone and allow the metal object(s) to cool before capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and
removing. Failure to wait until the object(s) cool could luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
result in personal injury, including burns. luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not place your vehicle key fob on the wireless
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
charging pad, the Keyless Enter-N-Go feature may not
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the ve-
work properly while a mobile phone is being charged.
hicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cau-
tions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it should
be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121

CAUTION!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and 3
secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is espe-
cially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 ▫ Yellow Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
4
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . .125 ▫ Blue Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY — IF ▫ Green Telltale Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ White Telltale Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .162
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
▫ Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items . . . . . . .129
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
䡵 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS

Base Instrument Cluster

 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125

Premium Instrument Cluster

Instrument Cluster Descriptions • The instrument cluster display features a driver-
interactive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
1. Tachometer
play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute further information.
(RPM x 1000).
3. Speedometer
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• Indicates vehicle speed.
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Fuel Gauge
CAUTION!
• The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
• The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
vehicle where the fuel door is located. pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
5. Temperature Gauge into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem- “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi- authorized dealer for service.
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge will likely indicate a higher temperature INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED
when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
normal operating range. the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of
a door will activate the display for viewing, and display
WARNING! the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instru-
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or ment cluster display is designed to display important
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for Using a driver interactive display located on the instru-
service if your vehicle overheats. ment panel, your instrument cluster display can show you
how systems are working and give you warnings when
they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
4

Premium Instrument Cluster Display

The instrument cluster display menu items consist of the
following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
Base Instrument Cluster Display
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Stop/Start (If Equipped)
• Audio
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Messages • Up Arrow Button
• Screen Setup Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward
through the main menu and submenus.
• Speed Warning
• Down Arrow Button
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering Push and release the down arrow button to scroll down-
wheel: ward through the main menu and submenus.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of a main menu
item.
• Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of a main menu
item.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and
1 — Up Arrow Button 4 — Down Arrow Button hold the OK button to reset displayed/selected features
2 — OK Button 5 — Left Arrow Button that can be reset.
3 — Right Arrow Button
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
Oil Change Reset 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the igni-
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
tion to the OFF/LOCK position.
cator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indi- reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. 4
cator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style. 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK 2. Navigate to ⬙Oil Life⬙ submenu in ⬙Vehicle Info⬙ in the
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after instrument cluster display.
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the fol-
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge resets to
lowing procedure.
100%.
Oil Change Reset Procedure
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to NOTE: The instrument cluster display menu items display
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speedometer With the vehicle OFF and in the RUN position, hold the
OK button for one second for Storage Mode.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
speedometer menu title is displayed in the instrument Push OK button to confirm vehicle storage. The instrument
cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow cluster display will display a countdown from ten to zero.
button to select the large or small digital speedometer
NOTE: Pushing and releasing the left arrow button will
display. Push and release the OK button to toggle units
cancel Storage Mode. If the procedure is cancelled or there
(mph or km/h) of the speedometer.
is a fault, the procedure will need to be restarted from the
Vehicle Info beginning.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the 1. After counting down, the instrument cluster display
Vehicle Info menu title is displayed in the instrument will display the message: “Storage Mode Engaged To
cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow Minimize Battery Drain.” Starting the vehicle will exit
button to scroll through the information submenus and Storage Mode.
push and release the OK button to select or reset the
resettable submenus: NOTE: Storage mode will increase the amount the time the
vehicle can be parked without the battery discharging
Tire Pressure beyond the point where the vehicle won’t restart. To use
Transmission Temperature the vehicle’s key fob, the driver will need to grab a door
handle to wake up the vehicle prior to it checking for the
Oil Temperature presence of a valid key and unlocking the door.
Oil Pressure — Gasoline Vehicle Only Driver Assist
Oil Life Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Driver Assist menu title is displayed is highlighted in the
Battery Voltage
instrument cluster display.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If Equipped The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on • Distance Setting Change
ACC system status.
• System Cancel
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
• Driver Override 4
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display: • System Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Off • ACC Proximity Warning
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive • ACC Unavailable Warning
Cruise Control Off.”
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
Control Ready.” (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on LaneSense — If Equipped
the steering wheel) and the following will display in the
The instrument cluster display displays the current La-
instrument cluster display:
neSense system settings. The information displayed de-
ACC SET pends on LaneSense system status and the conditions that
need to be met. For further information, refer to “La-
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
neSense — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
instrument cluster.
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Fuel Economy menu title is displayed in the instrument Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
cluster display. Push and hold the OK button to reset display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip
average fuel economy feature. A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the follow-
ing:
• Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi
or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in • Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
the tank. When the Range value is less than 30 miles for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
(48 km) estimated driving distance, the Range display
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
will change to a “LOW FUEL” message. Adding a
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) of Trip A or Trip B
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
since the last reset.
“LOW FUEL” message and a new Range value will
display. Range cannot be reset through the OK button. • Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
• Average – The display shows the average fuel economy Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
(MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset. Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
• Current – This display shows the current fuel economy display. Push and release the right arrow button to display
(MPG, L/100 km) form while driving. the Stop/Start status.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
Audio Upper Left
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Audio • None
menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display.
• Compass (default setting)
Stored Messages
• Outside Temp
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
• Time 4
Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. This feature shows the number of stored • Range
warning messages. Pushing the left or right arrow button
will allow you to scroll through the stored messages. • Fuel Economy Average

Screen Setup • Fuel Economy Current

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the • Trip A
Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instru- • Trip B
ment cluster display. Push and release the OK button to
enter the sub-menus and follow the prompts on the screen Upper Right
as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change • None
what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed. • Compass

Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items • Outside Temp (default setting)

Gear Display • Time

• Full (default setting) • Range

• Single • Fuel Economy Average

134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Fuel Economy Current • Audio (show/hide)
• Trip A • Messages
• Trip B • Screen Setup
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings) • Speed Warning (show/hide)
• Cancel The menu with (show/hide) means user can press OK
button to choose show or hide this menu on the instrument
• Restore
cluster display.
Current Gear
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped
• On The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled on ve-
• Off (default setting) hicles with manual shifting mode. The GSI provides the
driver with a visual indication within the instrument
Favorite Menus — Equipped cluster display when the recommended gear shift point has
• Speedometer been reached. This indication notifies the driver that
changing gears will allow a reduction in fuel consumption.
• Vehicle Info When the shift up indicator is shown on the display, the
• Terrain (show/hide) GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
• Driver Assist (show/hide) The GSI indicator in the instrument cluster display remains
illuminated until the driver changes gear, or the driving
• Fuel Economy (show/hide) conditions return to a situation where changing gear is not
• Trip Info (show/hide) required to improve fuel consumption.
• Stop/Start
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
Speed Warning — If Equipped Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
Speed Warning Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button
drive cycle.
to enter speed warning. Use the up or down arrow button
to select a desired speed, then push and release the OK When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery 4
button to set the speed. The Speed Warning telltale will Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
display in the instrument cluster display, and a chime will instrument cluster display.
sound with a pop up warning message when the set speed
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
is exceeded.
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — that the charging system cannot sustain.
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical • The charging system is independent from load reduc-
system and status of the vehicle battery. tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical • If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing Charge Warning Light” in “Warning And Indicator
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads. Lights And Messages” located in ”Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), • Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electri-
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load cal accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar de-
reduction: vices.
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel • Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
(weeks, months).
• HVAC System
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
• 115V AC Power Inverter System completely.
• Audio and Telematics System • The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions: • The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
consoles and similar devices.
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
What to do when an electrical load reduction action WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver The warning/indicator light switches on in the instrument
Mode”) panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
During a trip: signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible: exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained 4
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior) in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V, carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
115V AC, USB ports chapter in the event of a failure indication.
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature) All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The
– Check the audio settings (volume) system check menu may appear different based upon
After a trip: equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (ad-
ditional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio sys-
tems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the mes-
sage is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight sec-
onds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s or passenger seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuck-
led, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light

Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driv-
ing, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illumi-
nate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”
in “Safety” for further information.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
Brake Warning Light

Red Telltale What It Means

Light
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake appli- 4
cation. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
English full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system mal-
function or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until
Metric
the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump
will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on fluid level checked.
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
WARNING!
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
repair to the ABS system is required. applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicle Security Warning Light

Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Oil Pressure Warning Light

Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle 4
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light

Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with se-
vere usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.

WARNING! CAUTION!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans- Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light

Red Warning
What It Means
Light
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light

Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-
hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
Battery Charge Warning Light

Red Telltale What It Means

Light
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run- 4
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency.”
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a prob-
lem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped
and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light re-
mains on with the vehicle under power, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine vehicle under power, immediate service is re-
quired and you may experience reduced performance, and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an au-
thorized dealer.
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If Equipped

Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering). Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

Door Open Warning Light

Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
Liftgate Open Warning Light

Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open. 4
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Hood Open Warning Light

Red Telltale
What It Means
Light
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Lights
Engine Malfunction Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does not come
on when placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to im-
mediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.

WARNING! CAUTION!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. Immediate service is required.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position. It should go out when the engine is running. If the “ESC Indi- 4
cator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in
the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be ON, even
if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
NOTE: This telltale indicates that an ESC event is active.
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light

Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indica-
tions corresponding to each tire in sequence.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
CAUTION!
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immedi- vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
ately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
your authorized dealership as soon as possible. should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord- the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to 4
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability. CAUTION!
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main- ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not have been established for the tire size equipped on
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
tire pressure telltale. damage may result when using replacement equip-
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc- ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho-
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the ben-
efits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light

Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and remain on
until fuel is added.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service
is required. 4

Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
This light indicates a potential system fault with the FCW system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

Forward Collision Warning Off Warning (FCW) Light

Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Forward Collision Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.

Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) System Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information,
refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
4WD Low Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and 4
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear drive- “Starting And Operating” for further information on four-
shafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front wheel drive operation and proper use.
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased
torque at the wheels.
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
Service 4WD Indicator Light
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and
have the vehicle serviced immediately.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense is solid yellow when the system senses a lane drift situation.
The LaneSense is flashing yellow when the system senses the lane has been approached and is in
a lane departure situation.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale
What It Means
Light
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service. Please see 4
your authorized dealer.

Blue Telltale Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Blue Telltale
What It Means
Light
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Lights
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light

Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
Turn Signal Warning Lights

Green Tell-
What It Means
tale Light
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal as selected, as 4
well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
LaneSense Indicator Light
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the sys-
tem is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque warn-
ing in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If
Equipped⬙ in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light

Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the Speed Control is SET. Refer to “Speed Control — If Equipped”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and the target vehicle is de-
tected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for 4
further information.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale
What It Means
Light
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and there is no target vehicle
detected. Refer to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙
for further information.
160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
White Telltale Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light

White Telltale
What It Means
Light
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set.

LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped

White Telltale
What It Means
Light
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left or
right lane marking has been detected. When both lanes are detected the telltale will light up
green, and the system will be ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display
if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If Equipped

White Telltale
What It Means
Light
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp will
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD 4
LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not
met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
Selec Speed Control Indicator Light — If Equipped

White Telltale
What It Means
Light
Selec Speed Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when “Selec Speed Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec Speed Control”, assure the vehicle is Four Wheel Drive Low (4WD) and push
the button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE: If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear
in the instrument cluster display.
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped

White Telltale
What It Means
Light
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been
turned on and in the READY state. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic trans- CAUTION!
mission control systems. When these systems are operating • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance further damage to the emission control system. It
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
current government regulations. vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system can be performed.
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
your service technician in making repairs. Although your will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices” and
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic “Uconnect CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access”
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to in your Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cyber-
information related to the performance of your emissions security” in “Multimedia”.
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac- EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and PROGRAMS 4
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
WARNING! inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
ready for testing.
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
vehicle control could occur that may result in an serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
accident involving serious injury or death. ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
• Access, or allow others to access, information for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow- tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
ing: OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
start this test over.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. indicate that the system is now ready.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen: ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
running.
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
 SAFETY

CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . .211
5
▫ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . .167 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . .181 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . .192
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .198 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . .198 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
166 SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak- • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking. by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and of such equipment should be performed by qualified
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight professionals.
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa- stop.
tion(s). • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
time after the stop). traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
• Brake pedal pulsations. another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
(Continued)
 SAFETY 167
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warn-
WARNING! (Continued)
ing Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner possible.
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance. 5
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
and control in various driving conditions.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Hill De-
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
scent Control (HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC).
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake This function manages the distribution of the braking
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
168 SAFETY
Brake System Warning Light longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds. WARNING!

If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
functioning properly and that immediate service is re- can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
quired. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
the light repaired as soon as possible. on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
Brake Assist System (BAS) exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys- others.
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies Hill Start Assist (HSA)
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no down the hill as normal.
 SAFETY 169
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
WARNING! (Continued)
activate:
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
• The feature must be enabled. active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
• The vehicle must be stopped. responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
• Park brake must be off. operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
• Driver door must be closed. all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your 5
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction a collision or serious personal injury.
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
Disabling And Enabling HSA
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
current setting, proceed as follows:
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a • If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
remain active. Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
WARNING! “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist mation.
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or

(Continued)
170 SAFETY
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster Towing With HSA
display, perform the following steps: HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing towing a trailer.
straight forward).
WARNING!
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake. • If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
4. Start the engine. with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
turn to the left. trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resum-
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch ing acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
bank below the climate control four times within 20 or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releas-
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on ing the brake pedal.
and turn off two times. • HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also,
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right. be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON. collision or serious personal injury.
If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA Traction Control System (TCS)
is disabled. This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
its previous setting. apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
 SAFETY 171
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential appropriate for the steering wheel position.
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
5
and ESC are in a reduced mode. Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
This system enhances directional control and stability of accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply- conditions.
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En- WARNING!
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path. • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
condition.
(Continued)
172 SAFETY
ESC On
WARNING! (Continued)
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa- This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of Partial Off
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main- The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac- spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can will turn off.
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death. NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Mul-
ESC Operating Modes tiple momentary button pushed may be required to return
to ESC On.
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
 SAFETY 173
NOTE: NOTE: System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial “Full Off” can only be achieved in Track Mode if so equipped.
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes if so
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
equipped. 5
the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC WARNING!
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
Full Off – If Equipped reduction and stability features are disabled. There-
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only fore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive ma-
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the neuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is in-
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine tended for off-highway or off-road use only.
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC • With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
ON again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch. engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or
off-road use.

(Continued)
174 SAFETY
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
WARNING! (Continued)
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre- tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
accidents, including those resulting from excessive up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions. road conditions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC NOTE:
OFF Indicator Light
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator each time the ignition is turned ON.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
be on even if it was turned off previously.
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been that caused the ESC activation.
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
customer has elected to have the Electronic Sta-
bility Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
 SAFETY 175
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
WARNING! (Continued)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the safety of others.
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only Trailer Sway Control (TSC) 5
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer
available ESC modes. Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
WARNING! Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
and driving conditions, influence the chance that swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve

(Continued)
176 SAFETY
torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions
WARNING!
in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability.
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to
load to eliminate trailer sway. reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the
driver receives that the feature is active is the torque
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) applied to the steering wheel.
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
full braking during emergency braking situations. It antici- realize the correct course of action through small torques
pates when an emergency braking situation may occur by on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers sensitivity
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop. and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
Rain Brake Support (RBS) important to realize that this feature will not steer the
vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in the vehicle.
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active, 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
there is no notification to the driver and no driver interac- descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
tion is required. controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) HDC has three states:
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides
 SAFETY 177
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation • R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
with brake or throttle application).
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling ve-
hicle speed). • 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Enabling HDC • 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the • 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h) 5
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed. • 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)

Activating HDC • 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)

Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if • 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed NOTE: During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by target speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by
using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the trans-
HDC set speeds: mission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
HDC Target Set Speeds speed and corresponding driving conditions.

• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not

activate
178 SAFETY
Driver Override • Driver door opens.
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or • The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for
brake application at anytime. greater than 70 seconds.
Deactivating HDC • The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur: • HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake Feedback To The Driver
application.
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the driver
below 40 mph (64 km/h). about the state HDC is in.
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude, • The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade. remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
Disabling HDC
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
following conditions occur:
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
• The driver pushes the HDC switch. seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to
excess speed.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
 SAFETY 179
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC Enabling SSC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the follow-
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
ing conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
cooled sufficiently.
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
WARNING! • Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling • Parking brake is released.
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must 5
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is re- • Driver door is closed.
sponsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed. • Driver is not applying throttle.
Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped Activating SSC
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling following conditions are met:
engine torque and brakes.
• Driver releases throttle.
SSC has three states:
• Driver releases brake.
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
• Transmission is in any selection other than P.
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding • Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling ve-
hicle speed).
180 SAFETY
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can be NOTE:
adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC
• During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for SSC target
set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade and the
speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the
level of set speed reduction depends on the magnitude of
transmission. While actively controlling SSC the trans-
grade. The following summarizes the SSC set speeds:
mission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected
SSC Target Set Speeds set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h) • SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select
mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
Driver Override:
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h) brake application at any time.
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h) Deactivating SSC
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h) SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
application.
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active • Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
 SAFETY 181
Disabling SSC • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following
switch but enable conditions are not met.
conditions occur:
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
• The driver pushes the SSC switch.
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range. excess speed.
• The parking brake is applied. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then extin- 5
guish when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for WARNING!
greater than 70 seconds.
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) vehicle speed when driving in off road conditions. The
(SSC exits immediately). driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
Feedback To The Driver: and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
speed.
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC switch
has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about the AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
state SSC is in.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
is the normal operating condition for SSC. based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
182 SAFETY
sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches ap-
proximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detec-
tion zones.
• The BSM system detection zone does NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
Rear Detection Zones (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The forward gear.
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
the vehicle is in PARK. located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function prop-
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane erly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
length starts at the outside mirror and extends approxi- bicycle racks, etc.)
mately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle.
The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
 SAFETY 183
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert Entering From The Side
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected side of the vehicle.
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.

Side Monitoring

Warning Light Location

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
184 SAFETY
Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.

Rear Monitoring

Overtaking/Approaching
 SAFETY 185

Overtaking/Passing Stationary Objects

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on lanes.
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
186 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

Opposing Traffic

WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal RCP Detection Zones
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
 SAFETY 187
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the Modes Of Operation
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately media” for further information.
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view 5
not be able to alert the driver. mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, includ- when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
ing reducing the radio volume. alert is requested, the radio is muted.
WARNING! Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
must be careful when backing up, even when using turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots object are present on the same side at the same time, both
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to
injury or death. the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
188 SAFETY
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM 2. The device must accept any interference received, in-
system, the radio is also muted. cluding interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio than an authorized service facility could void authorization
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the to use this equipment.
RCP state always requests the chime.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Blind Spot Alert Off — If Equipped
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems. Operation
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with miti-
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is gation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may
used. apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited brak-
General Information
ing are intended to provide the driver with enough time to
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Stan-
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
dards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
 SAFETY 189
If the driver does not take action based upon these pro-
gressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the
warnings by braking and the system determines that the
driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not
applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required. 5
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warn-
ing with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the FCW Message
system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
and then release the brakes. front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
190 SAFETY
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.

WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every Forward Collision Button
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon- To turn the FCW system off, push the forward collision
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warn-
ing could lead to serious injury or death. To turn the FCW system back on, push the forward
collision button again to turn the system on (LED turns
Turning FCW On Or Off off).
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the • Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents the system
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you. in front of you.
The forward collision button is located on the switch panel • Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns
below the Uconnect display. the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near warns
the driver later.
 SAFETY 191
• Changing the Active Braking status to “off” prevents the provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which
system from providing limited active braking, or addi- allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
tional brake support if the driver is not braking ad-
NOTE:
equately in the event of a potential frontal collision, but
maintains the audible and visual warnings. • The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one
key cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will • FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
remain off when the vehicle is restarted. head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path 5
of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are higher rate of speed.
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
screens.
tion.
FCW Limited Warning
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Lim-
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front ited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality
of you when you are farther away and it applies limited Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
braking. This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the
possible collision. vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
limited the system performance is no longer present, the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
system will return to its full performance state. If the
in front of you when you are much closer. This setting
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
192 SAFETY
Service FCW Warning tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for information on how to properly inflate the
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
reads:
vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required adjustment for this increased pressure.
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
pressure loss through the tire.
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
mended cold placard pressure. (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
Telltale Light” to turn off.
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
 SAFETY 193
The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pres-
CAUTION!
sure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle • The TPMS has been optimized for the original
may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15.5 mph equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa- warning have been established for the tire size
tion. equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold eration or sensor damage may result when using
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of replacement equipment that is not of the same size, 5
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a sensor damage.
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire • Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still checked.
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the NOTE:
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
194 SAFETY
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
while adjusting your tire pressure. pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla- The TPMS consists of the following components:
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
• Receiver module
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain • Various tire pressure monitoring system messages,
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure which display in the instrument cluster
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to
• Tire pressure monitoring telltale light
trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light”. Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
tire. illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
Premium System four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message for a minimum of five
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to seconds, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic showing
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure values in a different color.
readings to the receiver module.
 SAFETY 195
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning 5
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recom-
received.
mended cold placard pressure value as shown in the
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically up-
date, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
instrument cluster will return to their original color, and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
196 SAFETY
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size
Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does
not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, spare tire.
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” 2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will remain on and
to any of the following: a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a different color
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message.
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
 SAFETY 197
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assem-
addition, the instrument cluster will display a “Service blies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
Tire Pressure System” message for five seconds and then installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off 5
Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the ve-
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the hicle for 10 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h). The TPMS
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS- will chime, the ⬙TPM Telltale Light⬙ will flash on and off for
TEM” message for five seconds and then display dashes 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will
(- -) in place of the pressure value. display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
non-matching full size, the TPMS will update automati- longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
cally. In addition, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a remain in place of the pressure values.
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this infor- 15.5 mph (25 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the ⬙TPM
mation. Telltale Light⬙ will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values
198 SAFETY
in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer be dis- Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
played as long as no system fault exists. are the restraint systems:
General Information Occupant Restraint Systems Features
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
• Seat Belt Systems
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). • Child Restraints
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
rized dealer.
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Important Safety Precautions
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
user’s authority to operate the equipment. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
 SAFETY 199
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints”). pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should be to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “If You
secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or Need Assistance” section for customer service contact
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do information. 5
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear WARNING!
seat.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
them or under their arm. cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
5. You should read the instructions provided with your younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
child restraint to make sure that you are using it restraint.
properly. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly. Seat Belt Systems
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
to inflate. could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
200 SAFETY
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the seat is unoccupied.
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped) led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
Initial Indication until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen- belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat to buckle their seat belts.
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in Change Of Status
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
 SAFETY 201
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck- sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
led again. part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
being thrown out of the vehicle.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
WARNING! 5
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
cargo is properly stowed. your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho- collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivat- wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
ing BeltAlert. • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver vehicle are buckled up properly.
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
Lap/Shoulder Belts outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with killed.
lap/shoulder belts.
(Continued)
202 SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether as low as possible and keep it snug.
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
death in the event of a crash. belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer your authorized dealer immediately and have it
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the fixed.
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat too high on your body, possibly causing internal
belt. People belted together can crash into one an- injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never buckle nearest you.
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
person, no matter what their size. properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
(Continued) your seat belt snugly.

(Continued)
 SAFETY 203
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the the seat.
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. 5
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect around your lap.
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

204 SAFETY
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

Positioning The Lap Belt

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the any slack in the shoulder belt.
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
sliding under the seat belt in a collision. the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
 SAFETY 205
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees 5
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the Adjustable Anchorage
latch plate.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the that it is locked in position.
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
206 SAFETY
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is Seat Belt Extender
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
into position. only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
WARNING! it must be removed.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer WARNING!
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and when worn, the distance between the front edge of
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort- the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
 SAFETY 207
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
5
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts bag must be replaced immediately.
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
Energy Management Feature
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Man-
wearing a seat belt. agement feature in the front seating positions that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
208 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) (If years old and under should always be properly restrained
Equipped) in a vehicle with a rear seat.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor WARNING!
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
locking feature for each seating position. restraint.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt with a rear seat.
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
the entire seat belt is extracted.
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
 SAFETY 209
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock- (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
ing mode. additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
WARNING! section of this manual. The table below defines the type of
feature for each seating position. 5
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
210 SAFETY
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu- 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle the entire seat belt is extracted.
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati- you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
years old and under should always be properly restrained to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
in a vehicle with a rear seat. Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can • The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child ture or any other seat belt function is not working
restraint. properly when checked according to the procedures
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle in the Service Manual.
with a rear seat. • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.

(Continued)
 SAFETY 211
Air Bag System Components
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain Some of the safety features described in this section may be
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child rized dealer.
restraints that have a harness for restraining the Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
child. system components:
5
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

Some of the safety features described in this section may be • Air Bag Warning Light
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional • Steering Wheel and Column
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho- • Instrument Panel
rized dealer.
• Knee Impact Bolsters
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
• Front Air Bags
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso- • Supplemental Side Air Bags
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. • Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
• Front and Side Air Bags Sensors
System Components:
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Occupant Classification System
212 SAFETY
Air Bag Warning Light The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
bag system immediately.
the air bags will not inflate.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
the ON/RUN position.
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
eight-second interval.
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warn- remains on while driving.
ing Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
initial startup.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
 SAFETY 213
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air
WARNING!
Bag Warning Light, refer to “Warning/Indicator Lights
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument And Messages” in “Getting to Know Your Instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to Panel” section of this manual.
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on Front Air Bags
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
5
system immediately. a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
could affect the Supplemental Restraint System AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will covers.
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the
fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to
alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has
come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
214 SAFETY

WARNING! (Continued)
need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing
child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster Locations Driver and Passenger Front Air Bag Features
1 — Driver Front Air Bag
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
2 — Passenger Front Air Bag
3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bolster and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
4 — Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag/Passenger Knee Impact appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
Bolster mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
WARNING!
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags output is used for more severe collisions.
(Continued)
 SAFETY 215
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
WARNING! (Continued)
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad- or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
vanced Front Air Bags. the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the only when the air bags are inflating.
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more 5
seat position. severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed to collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appro- your seat belts even though you have air bags.
priate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as determined
Front Air Bag Operation
by the OCS.
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
WARNING! tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
inflate.

(Continued)
216 SAFETY
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little Passenger Seat
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
deceleration. this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not weight, as determined by the OCS.
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
deployed. following:
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag. • Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor lo-
cated in the front passenger seat
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of • Air Bag Warning Light
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags. Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most
the driver and front passenger. probable classification. The OCM communicates this infor-
mation to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
based on occupant classification. In order for the OCS to
 SAFETY 217
operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger Front Passenger Seat Front Passenger Air Bag
to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Occupant Status Output
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deploy-
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation ment
rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS Child, including a child in Reduced-power deploy-
estimates that: a forward-facing child re- ment OR Full-power de-
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light straint or booster seat* ployment
5
objects on it; or Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de-
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passen- ployment
ger, including a child; or
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deploy-
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing ment
child restraint; or
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time. deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passen-
ger seat.
218 SAFETY
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
WARNING!
ably on or near the floor
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an • Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can seatback in an upright position
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable

classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the
front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be Seated Properly
adjusted. Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are: inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
 SAFETY 219
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
weight on the front passenger seat
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may panel).
result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to
most probable classification of the occupant that it detects.
face the rear of the vehicle.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted • The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright 5
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a position.
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
on the front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. • Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and
passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of
center console.
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of im-
proper front passenger seating include: • Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front pas-
senger’s seated weight.
220 SAFETY
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:

Not Seated Properly

Not Seated Properly

 SAFETY 221

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly

WARNING!
• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.

(Continued)
222 SAFETY
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or
WARNING! (Continued)
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
seatback in an upright position, your back against service immediately.
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS compo-
near the floor. nents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front Air
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat. seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS compo-
Holding an object may provide an output signal to nents must function as designed. Do not make any modi-
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop- fications to the front passenger seat components, assembly,
erly seated weight input, which may result in serious or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs
injury or death in a collision. service for any reason, take the vehicle to your authorized
• Placing an object on the floor under the front pas- dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working be used.
properly, which may result in serious injury or death The following requirements must be strictly followed:
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat. • Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
 SAFETY 223
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat. Knee Impact Bolsters
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
be modified or replaced with any part except those pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact 5
• Unapproved modifications or service procedures to bolsters in any way.
the passenger seat assembly, its related components, • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This radios, etc.
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air
modified vehicle may not comply with required Bags
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
(CMVSS). steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
persons with disabilities, contact your authorized compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
dealer. enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air
bags.
224 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bags When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover (front seats) and the seam
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
on the outboard side of the seat cushion’s trim cover
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): (outboard rear seats — if equipped with rear SABs). The
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR- between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. very high speed and with such a high force that it could
injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items
are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.

WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SABs; the performance could be
adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into
you, causing serious injury.

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, “AIRBAG.”
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
 SAFETY 225
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
and its deployment path are located should remain 5
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
Label Location
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
body structure. activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win- The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
226 SAFETY
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
WARNING!
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
WARNING! of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
killed.
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
they are in an infant or child restraint.
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
Side Air Bags.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re- Side Impacts
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
appropriate for the size of the child. determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
 SAFETY 227
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretension-
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the ers, with or without the Side Air Bags, on both sides of the
right Side Air Bags only. vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger certain rollover or side impact events.
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the 5
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
deploy.
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Rollover Events
Air Bag System Components
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover Some of the safety features described in this section may be
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro- equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle rized dealer.
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A • Air Bag Warning Light
slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-developing • Steering Wheel and Column
event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the • Instrument Panel
Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover
• Knee Impact Bolsters
228 SAFETY
• Front Air Bags or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• Front and Side Air Bags Sensors
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
• Seat Track Position Sensors process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
• Occupant Classification System rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
If A Deployment Occurs
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
deployment. cleaning.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
air bag system. not be in place to protect you.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
 SAFETY 229
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
WARNING!
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat button.
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem- • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. the battery has power.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well. • Unlock the power door locks.
5
NOTE: Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
but they will open during air bag deployment.
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
authorized dealer immediately. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
Enhanced Accident Response System
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
In the event of an impact, if the communication network the engine.
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
230 SAFETY
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could system for persons with disabilities, contact your
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be authorized dealer.
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in- Event Data Recorder (EDR)
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
side steps or running boards. in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
your vehicle that it has an air bag system. seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag record such data as:
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made. • How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim were buckled/fastened;
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
(Continued)
 SAFETY 231
• These data can help provide a better understanding of Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
seats rather than in the front.
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
WARNING!
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold 5
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi- even an infant on your lap could become so great that
gation. you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as restraint for the child’s size.
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
EDR. adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Child Restraints Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
the labels attached to the child restraint.
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
232 SAFETY
NOTE: • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Recommended Type Of Child

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
younger and who have not reached ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
the height or weight limits of their in the rear seat of the vehicle
child restraint
Small Children Children who are at least two years Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
old or who have out-grown the a five-point Harness, facing forward
height or weight limit of their rear- in the rear seat of the vehicle
facing child restraint
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
forward-facing child restraint, but vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
are too small to properly fit the vehi- seat of the vehicle
cle’s seat belt
Children Too Large for Child Re- Children 12 years old or younger, Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
straints who have out-grown the height or seat of the vehicle
weight limit of their booster seat
 SAFETY 233
Infant And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear- cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle 5
is recommended for children from birth until they reach with a rear seat.
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing Older Children And Child Restraints
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until for children who are over two years old or who have
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
convertible child seat. rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
234 SAFETY
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they Children Too Large For Booster Seats
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
seat belt. the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
WARNING! test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant belt alone:
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow vehicle seat?
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint. 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be- back?
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments. 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve- tween their neck and arm?
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in child’s thighs and not their stomach?
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
personal injury. child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
 SAFETY 235
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
WARNING!
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
5
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
Weight of the LATCH – Lower Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top
Child + Child Anchors Only Anchors + Top Tether Anchor
Restraint Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than 65 lbs X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing More than 65 lbs X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
236 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
Restraint System restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle

LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top Second Row LATCH Positions
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These • Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats seating position
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi- • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
 SAFETY 237

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
weight + weight of the child re- combined weight of the child and the child
straint) for using the LATCH anchor- restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
age system to attach the child re- and tether anchor instead of the LATCH sys-
straint? tem once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the No Do not use the seat belt when you use the 5
seat belt be used together to attach a LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
rear-facing or forward-facing child facing or forward-facing child restraint.
restraint?
Can two child restraints be attached No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
using a common lower LATCH an- or more child restraints. If the center position
chorage? does not have dedicated LATCH lower an-
chorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front
touch the back of the front passenger passenger seat if the child restraint manufac-
seat? turer also allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All rear head restraints may be removed.
238 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are There are tether strap anchorages behind each
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it rear seating position located on the back of the
meets the seatback. They are just visible when seat.
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Tether Anchorage Locations

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
LATCH Anchorages Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
 SAFETY 239
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D and
5
E are used for the left outboard position behind the driver
(3). Anchorages C and D are used for the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH–
compatible position in your vehicle. LATCH Positions
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
system at the same time. If you can fit three child restraints anchorages in this vehicle:
in your vehicle, you must use the seatbelt to install the
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
center child restraint and you must use the LATCH an-
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
chors for position (3) behind the driver. You can use either
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing
D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
the third child seat in position (1) behind the front passen-
child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing and
ger.
buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restraint an
occupant or child restraint in the center seating position.
2. Right outboard and center seating positions (1 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the right outboard seating
240 SAFETY
position using lower anchorages A and B. Install the
WARNING! (Continued)
second child seat using the center anchorages, C and D.
Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the opposite (3), behind the driver. You may use either the LATCH
door, E. Do not use the remaining left outboard seating anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing the
position (3) for any occupant. The center child restraint child seat in position (1), behind the front passenger.
will block the seat belt buckle for this position. Please refer to “Installing the LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint System” for typical installation in-
WARNING! structions.

• Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH- To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

compatible child restraint in the center seating posi- If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
tion (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle. Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
• A child restraint installed in the center position (2) type of seat belt each seating position has.
will block the seat belt buckle for the empty left
outboard seat behind the driver (3). Do not use this 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
seat for another occupant. tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
than one child restraint. ages.
• If you are installing three child restraints next to each 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
other, you must use the seat belt and the center tether that seating position. For some second row seats, you
anchor for the center position. You must use the may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
LATCH anchors to install the child seat in position restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
(Continued)
 SAFETY 241
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
allow more room for the child seat. child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
position.
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
5
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- that they should not play with them.
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
WARNING!
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in • Improper installation of a child restraint to the
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur- LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
er’s instructions. straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
direction. only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
Seat Belt other items or equipment to the vehicle.
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
242 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
Belt (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in information on ALR.
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a Please see the table below and the following sections for
lap/shoulder belt. more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
WARNING!
Restraints In This Vehicle
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
 SAFETY 243

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child re- using the seat belt to install a for-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor ward facing child restraint, up to the
with the seat belt to attach a forward recommended weight limit of the
facing child restraint? child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passenger
touch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is al- 5
seat? lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All rear head restraints may be re-
moved.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the belt seating position with an ALR retrac-
path of the child restraint? tor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
WARNING!
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in • Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
lap/shoulder belt. child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
244 SAFETY
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
portion around the child restraint while you push the
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
seat.
child seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
“click.” tether anchor.
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
against the child seat. back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
direction.
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
 SAFETY 245
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
Anchorage install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
WARNING! better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat available.
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path 5
that is approved for that seating position, located for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether route the tether strap under the head restraint and
anchorages in your vehicle. between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
246 SAFETY

WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.

Tether Anchorage Locations Transporting Pets

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
collision.
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
 SAFETY 247
SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
WARNING!
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA. Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
WARNING! Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked these safety tips since vehicle equipped with a gas 5
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may engine the following applies:
cause serious injury or death. • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, confined areas any longer than needed to move your
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people vehicle in or out of the area.
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
injured or killed. rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
using a seat belt properly. engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the

vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
248 SAFETY
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam- chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex- driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
or oil change. Replace as required. “Safety” for further information.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Defroster
Seat Belts Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the
blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
air directed against the windshield. See your authorized
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
retractor condition, replace the seat belt. that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera-
Air Bag Warning Light
tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to vehicle in other ways.
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
 SAFETY 249

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked • ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause side floor area. To check for interference, with the
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
• ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat 5
the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor
mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the trunk.
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. • ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT passenger’s side floor area.
FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any • ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an addi-
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
vehicle control.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
250 SAFETY
Lights
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re- Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for panel.
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch Door Latches
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check Fluid Leaks
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
by lightly pulling mat.
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
The Vehicle immediately.

Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
 STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 ▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine. . . . . . . . . .255 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Extreme Cold Weather 䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . .271
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 6
▫ 1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) —
▫ Extended Park Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 ▫ 2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4x4) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .257
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .258
▫ Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System —
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Electric Park Brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
䡵 SELEC-TERRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
䡵 POWER STEERING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .264
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . .279
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 ▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not ▫ To Activate/Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Autostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . . .281
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .282
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . .283
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . . .293
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ To Set A Desired Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . . .297
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . . .297
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC. . . . . . . . .300
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .303
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . . .288
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . .288
 STARTING AND OPERATING 253
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 䡵 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense. . . . . . . . . . .311
Assist System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .311
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Operation/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .312 ▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF 6
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 ▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 ▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 ▫ LaneSense Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .324 ▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . . .324 䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .325
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .325
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .370
▫ Common Towing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 ▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With 1-Speed
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings). . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With 2-Speed
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
䡵 DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
 STARTING AND OPERATING 255
STARTING PROCEDURES Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. driving range.
Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine
WARNING!
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob obtained without pumping or pushing the accelerator pedal.
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped Turn the ignition to the START mode and release when the
with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds:
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the 6
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. 1. Place the ignition in the LOCK/OFF mode
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with 2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is 3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others Tip Start Feature
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake, Place the ignition in the START mode and release it as the
brake pedal or the gear selector. starter engages. The starter motor will automatically dis-
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in engage itself once engine is running. If the engine fails to
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 sec-
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- onds. If this occurs:
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could 1. Place the ignition in the OFF mode.
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle. 2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
CAUTION!
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continu-
from your authorized dealer) is recommended. ously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle If Engine Fails To Start
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
WARNING!
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle. • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
when the engine starts. serious personal injury.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
ignition to the OFF position, wait five seconds to allow started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis-
the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park sion cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
Starting procedure. enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
procedure. or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 257
After Starting 4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the driver’s
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
side headlamp.
decrease as the engine warms up.
NOTE:
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are
quicker starts in cold weather. available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and 6.5
a grounded, three-wire extension cord. Amps to activate the heater element.
6
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine • The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood, WARNING!
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater: Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver’s cord could cause electrocution.
side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 PARKING BRAKE
or 90 km/h) are desirable. Electric Park Brake (EPB)
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- additional features that make the parking brake more
mental and should be avoided. convenient and useful.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions vehicle, make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom- certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer
You can engage the park brake in two ways:
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
CAUTION!
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the customer programmable features section of the
in the engine or damage may result. Uconnect settings.
The park brake switch is located in the center console.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 259
NOTE: The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the released or
applied position. The light will extinguish upon releasing
the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking brake
will automatically engage whenever the transmission is
placed into PARK, when the ignition is turned OFF. If your
foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount
of brake pedal movement while the park brake is engaging.
6
The park brake will release automatically when the igni-
tion is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE, the
Electric Park Brake Switch
driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is made to drive
away.
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch
the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages. Once must be in the ON/RUN mode. Put your foot on the brake
the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE telltale light in pedal, then push the park brake switch down momentarily.
the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the
illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You may also
apply the park brake, you may notice a small amount of notice a small amount of movement in the brake pedal.
brake pedal movement. The park brake can be applied Once the park brake is fully disengaged, The BRAKE
even when the ignition switch is OFF but the BRAKE telltale light in the instrument cluster and the LED indica-
telltale light will not illuminate, however, it can only be tor on the switch will extinguish.
released when the ignition is in the ON/RUN mode.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
WARNING! (Continued)
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise a location accessible to children, and do not leave a
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
parking brake should always be applied whenever the windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
driver is not in the vehicle. • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
WARNING! a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
possible injury or damage. and cause damage or injury.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. CAUTION!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to thorized dealer immediately.
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector. If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
(Continued) maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake
 STARTING AND OPERATING 261
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE Auto Park Brake
telltale light will illuminate, and a continuous chime will The electric park brake can be programmed to be applied
sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated auto- automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
matically while the vehicle remains in motion. the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, whenever
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion, the ignition is turned “OFF”. Auto Park Brake is enabled
release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete and disabled by customer selection through the customer
stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle reaches programmable features section of the Uconnect Settings.
approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will
Any single auto park brake application can be bypassed by
remain engaged.
pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the 6
transmission is placed in PARK.
WARNING!
SafeHold
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
may cause serious damage to the brake system. Be sure System that will engage the park brake automatically if the
the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition is in RUN.
failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. For automatic transmissions, the park brake will automati-
cally engage if all of the following conditions are met:
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate. This • The vehicle is at a standstill.
may be accompanied by the BRAKE telltale light flashing.
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
In this event, urgent service of the electric park brake
accelerator pedal.
system is required. Do not rely on the parking brake to
hold the vehicle stationary. • The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the • The park brake must be unapplied.
Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open.
• The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again
once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp
is turned to the OFF position and back to ON again. will flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
Brake Service Mode When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the park brake system to normal
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
operation:
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You • Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake ser-
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
vice.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the electric park brake system, this can WARNING!
only be done after retracting the Electric Park Brake You can be badly injured working on or around a
actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
by entering the Brake Service Mode through the Uconnect have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
Settings in your vehicle. This menu based system will have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
guide you through the steps necessary to retract the EPB job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 263
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is possible injury or damage.
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leav- 6
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. ing the vehicle.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, (or, with Keyless mission gear selector.
Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode) the • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle a location accessible to children), and do not leave
against unwanted movement. the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from could operate power windows, other controls, or
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. move the vehicle.

(Continued)
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
CAUTION!
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake
precautions are not observed: pedal must be pressed.
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEU-
vehicle has come to a complete stop. TRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, stopped or moving at low speeds.
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
firmly pressing the brake pedal. The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear
shifting out of PARK.
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. You
Key Ignition Park Interlock must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
speeds (refer to ⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys-
ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
tem⬙ in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal
position. The key fob can only be removed from the
driving.
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position. schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
 STARTING AND OPERATING 265
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
(kilometers). it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3,
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the custom-
to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
er’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some
vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in
very specific driving situations and conditions.
6
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS
shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS) Opera-
tion⬙ in this section for further information). Moving the
gear selector into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the DRIVE
position) activates ERS mode, displays the current gear in Gear Selector
the instrument cluster, and prevents automatic upshifts
beyond this gear. In ERS mode, toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the highest avail-
able gear.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges When exiting the vehicle, always:
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or • Apply the parking brake.
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
• Turn the engine OFF.
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold. • Remove the key fob.
PARK (P)
WARNING!
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
range. possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
brake. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leav-
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before ing the vehicle.
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

(Continued)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 267

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

someone or something. Only shift into gear when the touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly mission gear selector.
pressing the brake pedal. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure a location accessible to children), and do not leave
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the could operate power windows, other controls, or
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, move the vehicle. 6
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) CAUTION!
position (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the
ignition is in the OFF mode), the transmission is • Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un- PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
wanted movement. mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the damage to the gear selector could result.
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with damage the drivetrain.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to

(Continued)
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
WARNING!
have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
gear selector and firmly move the selector all the way ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
forward until it stops and is fully seated. that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
• Look at the transmission gear position display and have a collision.
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector CAUTION!
will not move out of PARK.
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
REVERSE (R) reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
stop. Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
NEUTRAL (N)
DRIVE (D)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be This range should be used for most city and highway
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 269
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in transmission fluid is warm (refer to the note within the
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while “Torque Converter Clutch” topic in this section). Normal
towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select operation will resume once the transmission temperature
(ERS) shift control (refer to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS) has risen to a suitable level.
Operation⬙ in this section for further information) to select
SPORT — If Equipped
a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear range will improve performance and extend transmis- This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift sched-
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. ule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to
make full use of available engine power. 6
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller may modify the trans- SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch on the
mission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or ex- center console. Refer to ⬙Selec-Terrain⬙ in this section for
pand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. further information.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due to Transmission Limp Home Mode
overheating.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmis- normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
sion Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
transmission may operate differently until the transmission Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
cools down. in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera- The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi- authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter mission.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can you set the transmission gear limit to 5 (fifth gear), the
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the transmission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift
following steps: through the lower gears normally.
1. Stop the vehicle. You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
position, the transmission will operate automatically, shift-
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. ing between all available gears.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. Moving the gear selector to the ERS position (beside
DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in
5. Restart the engine.
the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the gear selector forward
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal (-) or rearward (+) will change the top available gear.
operation.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear selector to the
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- DRIVE position.
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos- WARNING!
tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. If
the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
is required. slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation personal injury.
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if
 STARTING AND OPERATING 271
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
deceleration (engine braking), move the gear selector into
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — If Equipped
the ERS position, then simply press and hold it forward (-).
The transmission will shift to the range from which the This feature provides on-demand four-wheel drive (4X4).
vehicle can best be slowed down. The system is automatic with no driver inputs or addi-
tional driving skills required. Under normal driving con-
Torque Converter Clutch
ditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted auto-
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A matically to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear 6
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different wheels.
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles [2
to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
warm.

1-Speed 4X4 Switch

272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.

CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the power transfer unit.

2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4x4) — If Equipped

2-Speed 4x4 Switch (with Rear Lock)

The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in the normal
driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttons provide three
selectable mode positions:
• 4WD LOW
• REAR LOCK (If Equipped)
• NEUTRAL
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW range
position can be used to provide an additional gear reduc-
tion which allows for increased torque to be delivered to
both the front and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is intended for
2-Speed 4x4 Switch
 STARTING AND OPERATING 273
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in 4WD LOW on
WARNING!
dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to driveline components. You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the
speed is approximately three times that of the normal NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
driving mode at a given road speed. Take care not to the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disen-
overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). gages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. should always be applied when the driver is not in the 6
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause vehicle.
damage to the driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, 4WD LOW
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides an
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit. additional gear reduction which allows for increased
torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels
Shift Positions
while providing maximum pulling power for loose, slip-
For additional information on the appropriate use of each pery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
4WD system mode position, see the information below:
NOTE: Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” for further
NEUTRAL information on the various positions and their intended
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain. It usages.
is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer
to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Procedures NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a mes-
sage will flash from the instrument cluster display with
Shifting Into 4X4 LOW
instructions on how to complete the requested shift. Refer
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To know Your
ignition in the ON mode and the engine running, shift the Instrument Panel” for further information.
transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD LOW”
Shifting Out Of 4X4 LOW
button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the
instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the
when the shift is complete. ignition in the ON mode and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD LOW”
button once. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete.
NOTE:
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will
flash from the instrument cluster display with instruc-
tions on how to complete the requested shift. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
Selec-Terrain Switch occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph
 STARTING AND OPERATING 275
(0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
(5 km/h), the 4WD system will not allow the shift. the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button
(located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking
WARNING! (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the complete.
vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disen- 6
gages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the

transmission to PARK.
2. Turn the engine OFF.
Neutral Button
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light
the engine.
stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
8. Start the engine.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
9. Release the parking brake.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE. Activating The Rear E-Locker
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure To activate the Rear E-Locker System, the following condi-
that there is no vehicle movement. tions must be met:
12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. 1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.
13. Apply the parking brake. 2. The ignition in the ON mode and the engine running.
14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, 3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 MPH (24 km/h).
and remove the key kob. 4. To engage Rear E-Locker, push the REAR LOCK button
Repeat steps 1-7 to shift out of NEUTRAL. once.
NOTE: When towing this vehicle behind another vehicle, Deactivating The Rear E-Locker System
the Mopar flat tow wiring kit must be used, and the To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, the following
parking brake must be released. Refer to ⬙Recreational conditions must be met:
Towing⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙ for further instruc-
tions. 1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and the REAR LOCK
indicator light on.
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System — If
Equipped 2. The ignition in the ON mode and the engine running.
The Rear E-Locker System features a mechanical locking 3. To disengage Rear E-Locker, push the REAR LOCK
rear differential to provide better traction in the 4WD LOW button once.
position. The “REAR LOCK” button is on the Selec-Terrain
Knob.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 277
NOTE: flash from the instrument cluster display with instruc-
tions on how to complete the requested shift.
• It may also be necessary to drive slowly steering back
and forth to complete engagement and disengagement SELEC-TERRAIN
of the E-Locker.
Description
• When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in the
instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button will Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle con-
begin to flash. When the shift is complete the REAR trol systems, along with driver input, to provide the best
LOCK indicator lights will remain on. performance for all terrains.
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired mode. 6
• When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in
the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button
will begin to flash. When the shift is complete the REAR
LOCK indicator lights will remain off.
• Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is for the vehicle to be rolling, below
15 MPH (24 km/h), while including right and left
steering maneuvers to allow for the clutch teeth to align.
• The Rear E-Locker System must be disengaged prior to Selec-Terrain Switch
taking the vehicle out of 4WD LOW range. If 4WD LOW
shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selec-Terrain offers the following modes: • Rock — Off-road calibration only available in 4WD
LOW range. Traction based tuning with improved steer-
• Auto — Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
ability for use on high traction off-road surfaces. Use for
operation can be used on and off road. Balances traction
low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
with seamless steering feel to provide improved han-
dling and acceleration over two-wheel drive vehicles. NOTE:
• Snow — Tuning set for additional stability in inclement • Rock mode is only available on the vehicles equipped
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces with the Off-Road package.
such as snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on
• Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed Control
certain operating conditions), the transmission may use
for steep downhill control. See “Electronic Brake Control
second gear (rather than first gear) during launches, to
System” in “Safety” for further information.
minimize wheel slippage.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
• Sport — This mode alters the transmission’s automatic
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
increased to make full use of available engine power. appear in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
NOTE: SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW is Panel” for further information.
selected.
• Sand/Mud — Off-road calibration for use on low trac- POWER STEERING
tion surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass. Driveline The electric power steering system will give you good
is maximized for traction. Some binding may be felt on vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
set to limit traction control management of throttle and efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
wheel spin. electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces
 STARTING AND OPERATING 279
assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you power steering system. You will lose power steering assis-
will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually. tance momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
WARNING! over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible. NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under 6
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon are
parking maneuvers.
displayed on the instrument cluster display
screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power service.
steering assistance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
information. The Stop/Start function was developed to reduce fuel
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFOR- consumption. The system will stop the engine automati-
MANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are cally during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
displayed on the instrument cluster display screen, it met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator
indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have oc- pedal will automatically restart the engine.
curred, which caused an over temperature condition in the
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Mode Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal cus- Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
tomer engine start. At that time, the system will go into safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met, Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Au- system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
tostop” mode. Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations the engine
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must will not stop:
Occur: • Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A • Driver’s door is not closed.
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To • Battery charge is low.
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable
• The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the cabin temperature has not been achieved.
brake pedal depressed.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate • HVAC set to MAX A/C.
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be • Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
• The transmission is not in a forward or reverse gear.
• Hood is open.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 281
• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode. Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Autostop Mode:
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure with
vehicle in DRIVE position. • The transmission gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
except in the PARK position.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• Accelerator pedal input.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• Engine temp too high.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
• 5 mph threshold not achieved from previous AU-
adjusted. 6
TOSTOP.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal appli-
• ACC is on and speed is set.
cations).
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times
without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/ • STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the • A STOP/START system error occurs.
items listed above.
• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon en-
gine restart.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric
Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
• The driver’s door is open and brake pedal released.
• The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled.
• The engine hood has been opened.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off, the
engine may require a manual restart and the electric park
brake may require a manual release (depress brake pedal
and push Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to “Instrument STOP/START OFF Switch
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument 2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
Panel” for further information. Instrument Cluster Display. Refer to “Instrument Clus-
ter Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
Panel” for further information.
1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
START system), the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to the ON
mode every time the ignition is turned off and back on.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 283
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further 6
information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
Speed Control Buttons
in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer. 1 — On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED 3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator 5 — CANC/Cancel
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
the steering wheel.
speed control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired Speed
WARNING!
Turn the Speed Control on.
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control button.
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
snow-covered or slippery. SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelera-
tor and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Activate
To Vary The Speed Setting
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will To Increase Speed
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The pushing the SET + button.
system should be turned off when not in use.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
WARNING! Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed incre-
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or (mph) or Metric (km/h):
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system U.S. Speed (mph)
off when you are not using it. • Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 285
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established. new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h) Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h. results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
6
continue to increase until the button is released, then the continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established. new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed To Accelerate For Passing
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pushing the SET - button. pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the To Resume Speed
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings”
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed incre-
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(32 km/h).
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Deactivate NOTE:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC/Cancel • If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will maintain a fixed set speed.
will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
speed from memory.
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition switch original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
off erases the set speed from memory. following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con- • Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an ap-
venience provided by cruise control while traveling on propriate distance between vehicles.
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
proper section within this chapter.
this section.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
NOTE: Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
selected.
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you. You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Al-
ways confirm which mode is selected.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 287

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience • Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
system. It is not a substitute for active driving following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi- target vehicle does not start moving within 3
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; minutes the parking brake will be activated, and
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe the ACC system will be cancelled.
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. You should switch off the ACC system:
Your complete attention is always required while • When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, 6
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a highway construction zones).
collision and death or serious personal injury. • When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
• The ACC system: when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a slopes.
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). • When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions • When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
into account, and may be limited upon adverse constant speed.
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.

(Continued)
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system. Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following con-
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons ditions:
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed) 5 — Distance Setting Increase • When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
Cruise Control On/Off
• When you apply the brakes.
2 — SET+/Accel 6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off • When the parking brake is set.
3 — RES/Resume 7 — Distance Setting Decrease
4 — SET-/Decel 8 — CANC/Cancel • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 289
• When the driver door is open at low speed. • The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speed.
only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
• ESC Full-Off Mode is active.
To Activate/Deactivate
To Set A Desired ACC Speed Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
+ button or the SET - button and release. The instrument display will read “ACC Ready.”
cluster display will show the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 6
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph
(32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will appear in the
instrument cluster display. To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
WARNING!
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on heated).
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. To Turn Off
You could lose control and have a collision. Always The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory
leave the system off when you are not using it. if:

To Cancel • You push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off

button.
The following conditions cancel the system:
• You push the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
• The brake pedal is applied. on/off button.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 291
• You turn the ignition to the OFF position.
WARNING! (Continued)
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low. decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
To Resume follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator To Vary The Speed Setting
pedal. The instrument cluster display will show the last set
To Increase Speed
speed.
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
NOTE: 6
pushing the SET + button.
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
seconds, then the driver will either have to push the RES speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reen-
gage the ACC to the existing set speed. U.S. Speed (mph)
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle • Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity. increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
WARNING! • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
The Resume function should only be used if traffic continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road in the instrument cluster display.
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or

(Continued)
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h) Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h. results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display. in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed NOTE:
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • When you override and push the SET + button or SET -
pushing the SET - button. buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen the vehicle.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
U.S. Speed (mph) engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph automatically slow the vehicle.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph. • The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the
in the instrument cluster display. ACC to the existing set speed.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 293
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
6
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting appears in the instrument cluster display.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)

 STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system will adjust the
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance set-
ting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
6
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short) ACC Activation).
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
necessary.
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
— Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
system applies the brakes.
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
lane, the instrument cluster display will show the “Sensed
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with stop system will cancel and the brakes will ramp-out.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
While ACC with stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
Brake Alert if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster opened, the ACC with stop system will cancel and the
display is a warning for the driver to take action and does brakes will ramp-out. Driver intervention will be required
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning at this moment.
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
WARNING!
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on personal injury.
the left hand side.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 297
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located • System Cancel
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
• Driver Override
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button • System Off
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following • ACC Proximity Warning
appears in the instrument cluster display:
• ACC Unavailable Warning
Adaptive Cruise Control Off 6
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
Cruise Control Off.” activity
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Display Warnings And Maintenance
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has “Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Warning
Control Ready.”
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
wheel) and the following will appear in the instrument conditions temporarily limit system performance.
cluster display:
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
ACC SET snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
cluster display.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
read “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
and the system will deactivate. sensor lens.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” • Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or require a sensor realignment.
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur. • Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunc-
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
tion.
Control is still available. For additional information refer to
“Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this When the condition that deactivated the system is no
section. longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
simply reactivating it.
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the NOTE:
vehicle behind the lower grille.
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sen-
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important sor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
to note the following maintenance items: every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 299
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermar- If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
ket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. examine the windshield and the camera located on the
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
operation. cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
when conditions temporarily limit system performance. Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or 6
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
Service ACC/FCW Warning
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind- If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
shield” and the system will have degraded performance. reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
shield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
see your authorized dealer.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of Offset Driving Condition Example
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Turns And Bends Using ACC On Hills
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stabil- your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
ity reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your mance may be limited.
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
6

ACC Hill Example

Turn Or Bend Example

302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lane Changing Narrow Vehicles
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC distance to the vehicle ahead.
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Narrow Vehicle Example

Lane Changing Example

 STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Stationary Objects And Vehicles Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary 1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
2. The device must accept any interference received, in-
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
of the device.
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
6
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Speed
Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example To change between the different control modes, push the
General Information Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
Pushing of the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Stan-
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
dards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Vary The Speed Setting
WARNING!
To Increase Speed
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is se- (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
lected.
U.S. Speed (mph)
To Set A Desired Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control results in an increase of 1 mph.
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM) will in the instrument cluster display.
appear indicating what speed was set. This light will turn Metric Speed (km/h)
on when the speed control is SET.
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 305
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will Metric Speed (km/h)
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
in the instrument cluster display.
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button. button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
6
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To To Cancel
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
• The brake pedal is applied.
U.S. Speed (mph)
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
results in a decrease of 1 mph. tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The vehicle parking brake is applied.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the • The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected heated).
in the instrument cluster display.
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Resume Speed ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
changed to the ON/RUN position.
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h). ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
To Turn Off
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
if: above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operat-
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button ing speed, a warning will appear within the instrument
is pushed. cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
• The ignition is turned OFF. decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low. (9 km/h).

• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is ParkSense Sensors

pushed. The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a direction, depending on the location, type and orientation
parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage of the obstacle.
Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 307
ParkSense Warning Display single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Pro- If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
grammable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor- and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
mation. tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the 6
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument cluster
display will show the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
308 STARTING AND OPERATING

Slow Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc

 STARTING AND OPERATING 309

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

310 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis- Greater 79-59 in 59-47 in 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
tance than (200- (150- (120- (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in
(in/cm) 79 in 150 cm) 120 cm) 100 cm) (30 cm)
(200 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
ing
Arcs — None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash- 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
Center ing ing
Arcs — None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
Right ing
Audible None Single 1/2- Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Alert Second (for rear (for rear (for rear
Chime Tone center only) center only) center only)
(for rear
center only)
Radio Vol- No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ume Re-
duced
 STARTING AND OPERATING 311
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
display.
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on. 6

Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instru-
ment cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display”. When the gear selector is
ParkSense Switch moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the condition, the instrument cluster display will show the
system, the instrument cluster display will show the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec- ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ mes-
onds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. condition, ParkSense will not operate.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
tion and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
cluster display will show a “PARKSENSE OFF” message
appear, see an authorized dealer.
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an autho-
when it is sounding a tone.
rized dealer.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
Cleaning The ParkSense System
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch can result in the system not working properly. The
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the
sensors. fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that
ParkSense System Usage Precautions an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
properly. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
affect the performance of ParkSense. causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster REQUIRED” message to appear in the instrument clus-
display will read “PARKSENSE OFF”. Furthermore, ter display.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 313
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the
CAUTION!
open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An open
liftgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
is behind the vehicle. recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
WARNING! detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
proximity.
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an 6
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
ParkSense.
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is IF EQUIPPED
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con- vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the sys-
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle tem detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
is behind the vehicle.
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
• The driver can override the automatic braking function
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the auto- NOTE:
matic brakes are being applied.
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not vehicle.
available.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a substitute the driver.
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if vehicle’s movements.
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limita-
with a detected obstacle.
tions of this system and recommendations.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
changed to the ON/RUN position.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
section of the Uconnect System.
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
for the automatic braking function through ignition (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the
cycles. system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in the
 STARTING AND OPERATING 315
instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is ParkSense Warning Display
too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately “Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer -
6 mph (9 km/h). Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
ParkSense Sensors Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or 6
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc- front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
tion, depending on the location, type and orientation of the “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
obstacle. Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense ParkSense Display
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in the Rear Park Assist
rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense Active Park
Assist System⬙ section for further information. When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has been
detected, the warning display will turn on indicating the
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/ system status.
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the distance and location relative to the vehicle.
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
orientation of the obstacle. display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.

Slow Tone/Solid Arc

Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

 STARTING AND OPERATING 317

Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

318 STARTING AND OPERATING

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
 STARTING AND OPERATING 319

WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis- Greater 79-59 in 59-47 in 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
tance than (200- (150- (120- (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in
(in/cm) 79 in 150 cm) 120 cm) 100 cm) (30 cm)
(200 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
ing
Arcs — None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash- 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
Center ing ing 6
Arcs — None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
Right ing
Audible None Single 1/2- Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Alert Second (for rear (for rear (for rear
Chime Tone center only) center only) center only)
(for rear
center only)
Radio Vol- No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ume Re-
duced
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region. As
the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast
sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone No Tone/Solid Arc
when the 1st flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 321

No Tone/Flashing Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

322 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

 STARTING AND OPERATING 323

WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance Greater than 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
(in/cm) 47 in (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert None None None Fast Continuous
Chime
6
Radio Volume No No No Yes Yes
Reduced
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
media” for further information.
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob-
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume settings
pedal is applied. will not be accessible from the instrument cluster display.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
vehicle is in REVERSE.
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display. The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
ParkSense Switch
REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. When the gear
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
selector is moved to Reverse and the system has detected a
system, the instrument cluster display will show the
faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will dis-
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
play a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
onds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
SORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
SORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds. After five
 STARTING AND OPERATING 325
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with ⬙UN- Cleaning The ParkSense System
AVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
depending on where the fault is detected. The system will a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is function- or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
ing properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the sensors.
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, ParkSense System Usage Precautions
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ NOTE:
messages if an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain dis- • Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, 6
played for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
“Instrument Cluster Display” for further information. operating properly.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ • Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN- tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
SORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an autho-
rized dealer. • When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the instrument cluster dis-
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
play, see an authorized dealer.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
WARNING!
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
Failure to do so can result in the system not working using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. serious injury or death.
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear • Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
REQUIRED” message to appear in the instrument clus- injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
ter display. hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
open position. An opened liftgate could provide a false mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
• There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the is behind the vehicle.
object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
application to be delayed.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 327
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of maneu-
CAUTION!
vering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. NOTE:
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the • The driver is always responsible for controlling the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
proximity. must intervene as required.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using • The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an substitute the driver. 6
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using • During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches
ParkSense. the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel,
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF and the driver will be required to manually complete the
EQUIPPED parking maneuver.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to • The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. envi-
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking ronmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if
maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, provid- searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will
ing audible/visual instructions, and controlling the steer- absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
ing wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
• New vehicles from the dealer must have at least 30 miles
defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains
(48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park
control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. De-
Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accurately.
pending on the driver’s parking maneuver selection, the
This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
to improve the performance of the feature. The system To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
will also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns
calibration to account for differences such as over or on).
under inflated tires and new tires. To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns
Assist System off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch, automatically for any of the following conditions:
located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.
• The parking maneuver is completed.
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space.
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering guid-
ance into the parking space.
• Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
switch.
• Driver’s door is opened.
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch • Rear liftgate is opened.
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 329
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a • The outer surface and the underside of the front and rear
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the dirt or other obstruction.
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manu- Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
ally. will turn off if any of the above conditions are not present.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
and search for a parking space when the following condi-
Display
tions are present:
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled 6
• Gear position is in DRIVE. the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to Switch to
• Ignition is in the RUN position. Perpendicular” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if
• ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated. you desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering
• Driver’s door is closed. wheel switch to change your parking space setting.
• Rear liftgate is closed. NOTE:
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h). • When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will Park Assist system will automatically search for a park-
instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven ing space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will turn signal is not activated.
cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system by
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking Active ParkSense Searching
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
 STARTING AND OPERATING 331
When an available parking space has been found, and the Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking the steering wheel.
sequence.

Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel

Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
gear selector into the REVERSE position. steering to complete.

Space Found — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
 STARTING AND OPERATING 333
The system will then instruct the driver to check their NOTE:
surroundings and move backward.
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
6
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manu-
ally.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for com-
pleting the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement. position.

Check Surroundings — STOP Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive

NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 335
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move forward.
steering to complete.

Check Surroundings — Move Forward

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement. position.

Check Surroundings — STOP Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse

NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 337
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move backward.
steering to complete.

Check Surroundings — Move Backward

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When the Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to Operation/Display
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is satis- When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled, the
fied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK. “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to Switch to Perpen-
The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position⬙ dicular” message will show in the instrument cluster display.
message will be momentarily displayed. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel switch to
change your parking space setting to a perpendicular maneu-
ver. You may switch back to parallel parking if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking maneu-
ver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK to Switch to
Parallel” message will appear in the instrument cluster display.

Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position

Active ParkSense Searching Display

 STARTING AND OPERATING 339
NOTE: When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular parking
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
sequence.
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a park-
ing space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any 6
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
the steering wheel. gear selector into the REVERSE position.

Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel Space Found — Shift To Reverse
 STARTING AND OPERATING 341
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move backward.
steering to complete.

Check Surroundings — Move Backward

Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manu-
ally.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed Check Surroundings — STOP
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
into the parking space. The system will provide a
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for com-
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
pleting the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 343
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
position. steering to complete.

Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will then instruct the driver to check their When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
surroundings and move forward. movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.

Check Surroundings — Move Forward

Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
position. steering to complete.

Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.

Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position

WARNING!
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position. Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be in- perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
structed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed. for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving for-
ward. You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 347
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
CAUTION!
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel, as well
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs as a visual warning in the instrument cluster display, to
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
not be detected when they are in close proximity. applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver 6
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn
recommended that the driver looks over his/her signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt
Assist system. the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED be provided.

LaneSense Operation NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above the steering wheel and provides an audible and visual
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
lane boundaries.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is “off”.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below
the Uconnect display.

Lane Sense On Message

To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once to turn the system off (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
LaneSense Warning Button state, on or off, from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button to turn the system on (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 349
LaneSense Warning Message detected and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unin-
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
tentional lane departure occurs.
condition through the instrument cluster display.
3.5 Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white. changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
6

System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale) Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
is solid white when only the left lane marking has been behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected • When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn solid
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
white. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
solid green when both lane markings have been detected
boundary.
and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in • For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure steering wheel will turn to the right.
occurs.

Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin

Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale) Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 351
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been 7.0 Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray
thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
6

System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has been
detected and the system is ready to provide visual
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line,
Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unin-
tentional lane departure occurs.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale changes
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is
from solid white to flashing yellow.
solid green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in
the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.

Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid

Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 353
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow. approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque
is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
of the lane boundary.
steering wheel will turn to the right.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
6

Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin

Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Changing LaneSense Status After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of
license plate.
the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- mable modes of operation that may be selected through the
dia” for further information. Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings. out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK
traction control system, electronic stability control, for-
or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
ward collision warning, etc.).
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
EQUIPPED backup path based on the steering wheel position. A
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear receiver.
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the image
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 355
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:

Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater) 6

WARNING! CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc- path.
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re- • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
do so can result in serious injury or death. that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds

up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed
for use with this vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door reinforce-
ment.
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located on the
driver’s side door trim).

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

NOTE:
• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door
using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch properly tightened.
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler cap.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 357
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the Malfunction
WARNING!
Indicator Light (MIL) will come on. Be sure the gas cap
is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled. • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
CAUTION! being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
tem could result from using an improper fuel filler
and may cause the MIL to turn on.
cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap 6
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the
ground while filling.
system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to
VEHICLE LOADING
turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top Certification Label
off” the fuel tank after filling. As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
• If fuel is spilled on surface on the paint, clear it tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
immediately to avoid damage the paint. affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
bottom of the label is your VIN. cle’s GVWR.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Tire Size
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
Rim Size
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
Payload listed.
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
Inflation Pressure
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo. This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Curb Weight
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded. of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Loading
CAUTION!
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be vehicle.
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the TRAILER TOWING 6
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the In this section you will find safety tips and information on
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow possible.
all loose items securely before driving. To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect follow the requirements and recommendations in this
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
the brakes operate. Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. and trailer when weighed in combination.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa- The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
tion. axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly.
Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all “Starting And Operating” for further information.
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for WARNING!
operation⬙ condition. It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
the trailer must be supported by the scale. control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Tongue Weight (TW)

WARNING!
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
or more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing the load on your vehicle.
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose Frontal Area
control of your vehicle and cause a collision. The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Trailer Sway Control for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to Rating (GAWR) requirements. 6
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch WARNING!
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, • An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of formance, and could result in a collision.
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they • Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
trailers. and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 363
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

Maximum GTW Maximum Tongue

Engine/Transmission Model Frontal Area
(Gross Trailer Wt.) Wt. (See Note)
2.4L/Automatic with FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
or without Trailer
Tow Package
3.2L/Automatic FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
3.2L/Automatic with FWD or 4WD 39.44 sq ft 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)
Trailer Tow Package (3.66 sq m) 6
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
your bumper or trailer hitch.
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended:

WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
Consider the following items when computing the weight possible:
on the rear axle of the vehicle: • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When traile-
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
ring cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
in or on your vehicle. control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
• The weight of the driver and all passengers. have a collision.

(Continued)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 365

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus- CAUTION!
pension, chassis structure, or tires. • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
• Safety chains must always be used between your (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the or other parts could be damaged.
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer 6
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
slack for turning corners. not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the loads.
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels. Towing Requirements — Tires
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four spare tire.
ratings are not exceeded: • Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
1. GVWR and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire
2. GTW inflation procedures.
3. GAWR
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
(Continued)
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
WARNING!
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure. • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement proce- tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capac- when you need them and could have a collision.
ity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
limits. tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. CAUTION!
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury. If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu- accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a effort, and longer stopping distances.
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
 STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness. 6

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle

but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer Four-Pin Connector
to the following illustrations.
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shift-
ing does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear range.

Seven-Pin Connector
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve per-
1 — Battery 5 — Ground formance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
4 — Electric Brakes provide better engine braking.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 369
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped Highway Driving
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. Reduce speed.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed Air Conditioning
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
Turn off temporarily.
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System 6
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

4X4 Models
Wheels
Front-Wheel 1-Speed
Towing OFF
Drive (FWD) Power Trans- 2-Speed Power Transfer Unit
Condition the
Models fer Unit
Ground
Flat Tow NONE NOT NOT See Instructions:
ALLOWED ALLOWED • Before towing, see your authorized dealer for the
Mopar flat tow wiring kit
• It is recommended to charge the battery of the towed
vehicle during recreational towing
• Transmission in PARK
• Power transfer unit in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow Front OK NOT NOT ALLOWED
ALLOWED
Rear NOT NOT NOT ALLOWED
ALLOWED ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
 STARTING AND OPERATING 371

4X4 Models
Wheels
Front-Wheel 1-Speed
Towing OFF
Drive (FWD) Power Trans- 2-Speed Power Transfer Unit
Condition the
Models fer Unit
Ground
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Elec-
tric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable
features in the Uconnect Settings. 6
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial High-
way Safety offices for additional details.
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) 3. Apply the parking brake. Place automatic transmission
Models in PARK, or manual transmission in gear. Turn the
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain engine OFF.
will result. 4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
Recreational towing (for front-wheel drive models) is al- the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
lowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This 5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If start the engine.
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. 7. Release the parking brake.

2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. 8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and release
the brake pedal.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With 2-Speed
CAUTION!
Power Transfer Unit
• Towing with the front wheels on the ground will The power transfer unit must be shifted into NEUTRAL
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from (N) and the transmission must be in PARK for recreational
improper towing is not covered under the New towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to
Vehicle Limited Warranty. the 4WD selector switch. Shifts into and out of NEUTRAL
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and (N) can take place with the selector switch in any mode
remains released, while being towed. position.
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With 1-Speed
Power Transfer Unit CAUTION!
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not • Failure to use the proper Mopar wiring kit to power
have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer unit. the steering system during recreational towing may
damage the vehicle’s steering system and/or other
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle vehicle components.
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground. • DO NOT dolly tow any 4x4 vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
CAUTION! will cause severe transmission and/or power transfer
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the unit damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing • Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War- backwards can cause severe damage to the power
ranty. transfer unit.

(Continued)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 373

CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disen-
towing. gages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
outlined under “Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)” to be the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
certain that the power transfer unit is fully in NEU- should always be applied when the driver is not in the
TRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result. vehicle.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or power Use the following procedure to shift the 4WD system into
NEUTRAL (N). 6
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty. CAUTION!
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
remains released, while being towed.
the power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N)
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
before recreational towing to prevent damage to inter-
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
nal parts.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission to PARK.
WARNING!
2. Turn the engine OFF.
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the 3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
(Continued)
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 9. Release the parking brake.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold 10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
the recessed NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the N
that there is no vehicle movement.
symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The light
will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to 12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
13. Apply the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the key fob.
15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
16. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not
start the engine.
17. Press and hold the brake pedal.
18. Release the parking brake.
19. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and release
Neutral Button the brake pedal.
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light
stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 375
NOTE: 3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start
the engine.
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must 4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
any of these requirements are not met before pushing
the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button
flash continuously until all requirements are met or until (located by the selector switch) for one second.
the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
6
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
Neutral Button
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con- 7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
nected to the tow vehicle. release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
2. Apply the parking brake.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the NOTE:
power transfer unit will shift to the position indicated
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
by the selector switch.
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
NOTE: When shifting the power transfer unit out of continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
NEUTRAL (N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid any of these requirements are not met before pushing
gear clash. the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during
the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
10. Release the brake pedal. NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle. • The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
12. Start the engine.
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
13. Press and hold the brake pedal. shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
14. Release the parking brake.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indi-
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
cates that shift requirements have not been met.
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
16. Re-enable the Auto Park Brake feature, if desired.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 377
DRIVING TIPS NOTE: When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as a
On-Road Driving Tips
precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nar- water may cause damage that may not be covered by the
rower track to make them capable of performing in a wide New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
variety of off-road applications. Specific design character-
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
istics give them a higher center of gravity than conven-
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
tional passenger cars.
vent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. (and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed 6
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off- effects.
road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this Flowing Water
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off)
rollover. avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
Off-Road Driving Tips flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water,
avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing
Driving Through Water water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water, into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are down-
there are a number of precautions that must be considered stream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
before entering the water:
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Standing Water information. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to
maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 16 inches
wheels and traction will be lost.
(40.5 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm) of Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
(Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water deeper Hill Climbing
than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 19 inches (48
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
cm) of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
Maintenance lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Transfer NOTE: Brakes should be applied at increased slippage, but
Unit, and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not been before coming to a stop to avoid digging into the loose
contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants (milky, surface and rendering the operator of the vehicle stuck/
foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon immobile.
as possible to prevent component damage.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional immediately apply the brakes. Once stopped, shift to
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the com-
gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain pression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed.
mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four-Wheel If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply
Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for further them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 379
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can
WARNING!
cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt whenever possible.
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and After Driving Off-Road
rolling the vehicle. Always back straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear carefully. Never back down a hill in Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
NEUTRAL using only the brake. does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage.
NOTE: Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - 6
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
drive straight up or down.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, exhaust system for damage.
ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
the front wheels slowly left and right. This may provide a
required.
fresh “bite” into the surface and may provide traction to
complete the climb. • Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
Traction Downhill
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD System values specified in the Service Manual.
to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent Control if
equipped (refer to ⬙Safety Features⬙ in the “Safety” section • Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
for further information). Let the vehicle go slowly down could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
the hill with all four wheels turning against engine com- lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
pression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.

WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the braking system
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking
performance. Full braking power may not be available
to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, inspect and clean the
braking components as soon as possible.

• Impacted material can cause wheel imbalance. Freeing

the wheels of impacted material will likely rectify im-
balance condition
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .383 䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .414
䡵 ASSIST AND 9–1–1 MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . .383 ▫ Tire Service Kit Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 ▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . . .415
▫ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 ▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 ▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .418 7

䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . .422

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 ▫ Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Interior Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 䡵 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . .405 ▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . .405 䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
382 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .429 䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .431
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ 4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer Unit . .431
▫ 4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Unit . .431
▫ Recovery Strap — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 383
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ASSIST AND 9–1–1 MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the lower
center area of the instrument panel.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your 7
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Assist And 9–1–1 Mirror
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
9-1-1 button.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery. WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
384 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE: 9-1-1 Call
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by 1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
the subscriber.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if you there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system
are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call
network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview
if your Uconnect Access service is active and you are Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off the green
network. LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
ASSIST Call 2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
any one of the following support centers:
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 op-
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
erator:
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside Assistance. • Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.

• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support for • The vehicle brand.
Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile fea- • The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
tures.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 385
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator 5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi- emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tional help is needed. tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

WARNING! WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the • If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection. operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle im-
mediately and move to a safe location.
NOTE: • Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper- 7
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized able 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS
by the subscriber. antennas. You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception,
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
emergency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or
may be able to open a voice connection with the
3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is re-
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
quired for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
Call system will attempt to remain connected with the
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the
connection. (Continued)
386 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
WARNING! (Continued)
following may occur at the time the malfunction is de-
can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add tected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri- • The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR • The Device Screen will display the following message
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, dealer.”
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE. • An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not WARNING!
there to help protect you.
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
9-1-1 Call System Limitations will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1 dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
Call system capabilities. • The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls. malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 387
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
WARNING!
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
limited to, the following factors: road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are the subscriber.
damaged during a crash.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X(voice/ 7
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon- data) or 3G(data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent
nected during a vehicle crash. 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) and GPS signal reception,
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global Po- which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emer-
sitioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed. gency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network connection and a GPS signal is required for the
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility. 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
388 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
General Information
CAUTION!
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
mirror clean.
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs

Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Cargo Lamp TL212–2
Overhead Console Lamp PLW214–2A
Reading Lamp WL212–2
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 389
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps 9005HL +
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps D3S (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Park/Daytime Running Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Front Fog Lamps PSX24W
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Rear Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) 7
Back-Up Lamps W16W or 921
License Plate Lamp W5W
Replacing Exterior Bulbs NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when
the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
Headlamps — If Equipped
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even WARNING!
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source your- A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
self. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
(Continued)
390 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the head-
WARNING! (Continued)
lamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocu-
tion if not serviced properly. See your authorized 7. Install the bulb cap in the headlamp housing and rotate
dealer for service. clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Install the three hex head screws into the wheel liner.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
Front Turn Signals And Front Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove the three hex head screws from the wheel liner.
1. Open the hood.
2. Pull the exterior edge of the liner towards the tire to gain
access to the headlamp bulb cap. NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the upper lamp
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to
assembly on the passenger side of the vehicle.
unlock it.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
4. Firmly grasp the bulb and connector assembly and
terclockwise, and then remove the bulb and socket
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
assembly from the lamp housing.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
then connect the replacement bulb.
ment bulb.
CAUTION! 4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the 5. Re-install air cleaner filter housing if removed.
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 391
Front Fog Lamp 2. Remove the screws that fasten the tail lamp housing to
the vehicle.
1. Remove the three hex head screws from the wheel liner.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disen-
2. Pull the exterior edge of the wheel liner towards the tire
gage the lamp from the vehicle.
to gain access to the bulb.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the fog lamp. 5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from
housing.
4. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
CAUTION! 7. Replace the bulb and install the socket. 7
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil 8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the 9. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and screws.
bulb with rubbing alcohol. 10. Close the liftgate.
5. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp
reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog
1. Open the liftgate.
lamp housing until it locks in place.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.
lower trim from the liftgate.
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
3. Once the trim is loose, pull it back exposing the trim
1. Open the liftgate. panel.
392 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Using a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver, open the FUSES
trim panel exposing the back of the liftgate lamp.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING!

6. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
lamp. priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
7. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket. fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
8. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket. fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
9. Connect the electrical connector. injury, fire and/or property damage.
10. Reinstall the trim panel and the lower trim. • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
11. Close the liftgate. and/or disengaged.
License Plate Lamp • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking tab • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on the bag system, braking system), power unit systems
lamp assembly for removal. (engine system, transmission system) or steering
2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive cur-
rent.
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 393
When a device does not work, you must check the electri- Underhood Fuses
cal circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt. The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in tridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies
vehicle battery discharge. each component is printed on the inside of the cover.

Blade Fuses Power Distribution Center

1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit
394 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F06 – – Not Used
F07 15 Amp Blue – Powertrain Control Module
- PCM (Diesel Only)
F08 25 Amp Clear – Engine Control Module
(ECM)/Fuel Injection
F09 – – Not Used
F10 20 Amp Yellow – Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
— If Equipped
F11 – – Not Used
F12 20 Amp Yellow – Brake Vacuum Pump — If
Equipped
F13 10 Amp Red – Engine Control Module
(ECM)
F14 10 Amp Red – Drivetrain Control Module
(DTCM)/Power Take-Off
Unit (PTU)/Brake System
Module (BSM) — If
Equipped/Brake Pedal
Switch/Back Up Switch
(Diesel Only)
F15 – – Not Used
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 395

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F16 20 Amp Yellow – Ign Coil (Gas)/Engine Sen-
sor (Diesel)
F17 – – Not Used
F18 – – Not Used
F19 – 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid
F20 10 Amp Red – A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 – – Not Used
F22 5 Amp Tan – Radiator Fan
F23 70 Amp Tan – Body Controller Module 7
(BCM) — Feed 2
F23 50 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Module
(VSM) Feed #2 — If
Equipped With Stop/Start
Engine Option
F24 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Wiper — If Equipped
With Stop/Start Engine
Option
F25B 20 Amp Yellow – Front Washer — If
Equipped With Stop/Start
Engine Option
F26 – 30 Amp Pink Fuel Heater - Diesel Only
F27 – – Not Used
396 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F28 15 Amp Blue – Transmission Control Mod-
ule (TCM)
F29 – – Not Used
F30 10 Amp Red – Engine Control Module
(ECM)/(EPS)/(PCM)
F31 – – Not Used
F32 – – Not Used
F33 – – Not Used
F34 – – Not Used
F35 – – Not Used
F36 – – Not Used
F37 – – Not Used
F38 – 60 Amp Yellow Glow Plugs (Diesel Only)
— If Equipped
F39 – 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Park Light — If
Equipped
F40 – 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Washer Pump
— If Equipped
F41 – 60 Amp Yellow Body Controller Module
(BCM) — Feed 1
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 397

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F41 – 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module -
Feed 1 — If Equipped With
Stop/Start Engine Option
F42 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Electric Brake
Module — If Equipped
F43 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump Motor
F44 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow / 7-Way Con-
nector — If Equipped
F45 – 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module
7
(PDM) — If Equipped
F46 – 25 Amp Clear Sunroof — If Equipped
F48 – 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module — If
Equipped
F49 – 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter (115V A/C)
— If Equipped
F50 – 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate — If
Equipped
F51 – – Not Used
F52 – 30 Amp Pink Front Wipers — If
Equipped With Stop/Start
Engine Option
398 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F53 – 30 Amp Pink Brake System Module &
Valves
F54 – 30 Amp Pink Body Control Module
(BCM) Feed 3
F55 10 Amp Red – Blind Spot Sensors/
Compass/Rearview
Camera/Trunk Lamp With
Flashlamp Charger — If
Equipped
F56 15 Amp Blue – Ignition Node Module
(IGNM)/KIN/RF Hub/
Electric Steering Column
Lock (ESL)
F57 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Lights Left —
If Equipped
F58 10 Amp Red – Occupant Classification
Module/VSM/ESC
F59 – 30 Amp Pink Drivetrain Control Module
(DTCM) — If Equipped
F60 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet - Center Con-
sole
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 399

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F61 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Lights Right —
If Equipped
F62 20 Amp Yellow – Windshield De-Icer — If
Equipped
F63 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated/Vented Seats
— If Equipped
F64 20 Amp Yellow – Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped
F65 10 Amp Red – In Vehicle Temperature
7
Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Driver Assist System Mod-
ule (DASM)/Park Assist
(PAM) — If Equipped With
Stop/Start option
F66 15 Amp Blue – HVAC (ECC)/Instrument
Panel Cluster (IPC)
F67 10 Amp Red – In Vehicle Temperature
Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Driver Assist System Mod-
ule (DASM)/Park Assist
(PAM) — If Not Equipped
With Stop/Start Option
400 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F68 – – Not Used
F69 10 Amp Red – Power Transfer Unit Switch
(TSBM)/Active Grill Shut-
ter (AGS) — If Equipped
With Gas Engine
69A 10 Amp Red – Power Transfer Unit Switch
(TSBM) — If Equipped
With Diesel Engine
F70 5 Amp Tan – Intelligent Battery Sensor
— If Equipped With Stop/
Start Engine Option
F71 20 Amp Yellow – HID Headlamp Right — If
Equipped With Stop/Start
Engine Option
F72 10 Amp Red – Heated Mirrors — If
Equipped
F73 – 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Back Up — If
Equipped
F74 – 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster
F75 20 Amp Yellow – Cigar Lighter — If
Equipped
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 401

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F76 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Differential Module
(RDM) — If Equipped
F77 10 Amp Red – Fuel Door Release/Brake
Pedal Switch
F78 10 Amp Red – Diagnostic Port/Digital TV
(Japan Only)
F79 10 Amp Red – Integrated Center Stack
(ICS)/HVAC/Aux Switch
Bank Module (ASBM)/
Instrument Panel Cluster 7
(IPC)
F80 20 Amp Yellow – Radio / CD — If Equipped
F81 – – Not Used
F82 – – Not Used
F83 – 20 Amp Blue Engine Controller Module
(Gas)
F84 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB)
— Left
F85 – – Not Used
F86 20 Amp Yellow – Horns — If Equipped With
Stop/Start Engine Option
402 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F87A 20 Amp Yellow – HID Headlamp Left — If
Equipped With Stop/Start
Engine Option
F88 15 Amp Blue – Collision Mitigation Mod-
ule (CMM)/
Electrochromatic Mirror/
Smart Camera Module —
If Equipped
F89 10 Amp Red – Headlamp Leveling — If
Equipped
F90 – – Not Used
F91 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet Rear — If
Equipped — Customer Se-
lectable
F92 – – Not Used
F93 – 40 Amp Green Brake System Module
(BSM) — Pump Motor
F94 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB)
— Right
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 403

Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F95 10 Amp Red – Electrochromatic Mirror/
Rain Sensor/Sunroof — If
Equipped/Passenger Win-
dow Switch/Power Outlet
Console/Digital TV (Japan
Only)
F96 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC)/(Airbag)
F97 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC)/(Airbag) 7
F98 25 Amp Clear – Audio Amplifier — If
Equipped
F99 – – Not Used
F100 – – Not Used
404 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the Body Control
Module (BCM) in the passenger compartment on the left
side dash panel under the instrument panel.

Cavity Blade Fuse Description

F13 15 Amp Blue Low Beam Left
F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting
F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module/Siren – If Equipped
F38 20 Amp Yellow Deadbolt All Unlock
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front
F48 25 Amp Clear Fog Lamp Rear Left/Right – If Equipped
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Wireless Charging Pad – If Equipped
F51 10 Amp Red Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors – If Equipped
F53 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F89 10 Amp Red Door Locks – Driver Unlock
F91 7.5 Amp Brown Fog Lamp Front Left
F92 7.5 Amp Brown Fog Lamp Front Right
F93 10 Amp Red Low Beam Right
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 405
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under the
WARNING! load floor behind the rear seat.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the 1. Open the liftgate.
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when 2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get 7
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or Load Floor Handle
slippery areas. 3. Remove the hook from the stowed position on the back
side of the load floor and place the hook over the top
body flange and weather seal. This will hold the load
floor up while obtaining the jack and spare tire.
406 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.

Jack And Tool Assembly

Jack And Spare Tire Fastener NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with
5. Remove the chocks. two attachment points. When the jack is partially ex-
panded, the tension between the two attachment points
6. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from holds the jack handle in place.
the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to
the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove the 7. Remove the spare tire.
wrench from the jack assembly.
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 407
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
WARNING!
opposite of the jacking position. For
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or example, if changing the right front
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. tire, chock the left rear wheel.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
or replaced immediately.
the vehicle is being jacked.
Preparations For Jacking Jacking Instructions
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery WARNING!
7
areas. Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING! • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the vehicle.
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
changing the wheel. • Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. • Set the parking brake firmly and set the transmission
in PARK.
3. Set the parking brake. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
4. Place the gear selector into PARK. jack.
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position. (Continued)
408 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
Jack Warning Label
facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.

2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap
covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry
the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 409
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel
with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise
one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill
cladding.

7
Rear Jacking Location

Jacking Locations
410 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Rear Jacking Engagement Point Front Jacking Location

 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 411
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly and
thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in mounting
the spare tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.

CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
7
Front Jacking Engagement Point
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.

WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.

6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.

Mounting Spare Tire

412 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE: 11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications”
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Servic- for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the
ing and Maintenance” for additional warnings, cau- correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
tions, and information about the spare tire, its use, and wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
operation. station.
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel
bolts.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.

10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle counterclockwise.
Assembled Jack
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 413
12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire. Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end
of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may 7
result in serious injury.

Stowed Tire, Jack And Chock 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
WARNING! 4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for
or replaced immediately. the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or service station.
414 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel chocks. Tire Service Kit Storage
Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor behind
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using the rear seat.
the means provided. Release the parking brake before
driving the vehicle. 1. Open the liftgate.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque with 2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.

TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED

Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Load Floor Handle
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 415
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the Black
Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
7
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
selecting this mode.
Tire Service Kit Components Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear) (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black) Using The Deflation Button
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
bottom side of the Tire Service
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Kit)
416 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions • When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
discarded.
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and • For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
Hose Replacement”. the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid inject-
ing sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.

Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire
application use and need to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 417

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle • A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
Kit. provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
the following circumstances: passengers, and others around you.
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately • Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
– If the tire has any sidewall damage. Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
– If the tire has any damage from driving with or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and 7
extremely low tire pressure. respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
tire. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
– If the wheel has any damage. contact with clothing.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
wheel. case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
source. of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
(Continued) not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
418 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve
Hazard Warning flashers.
stem.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the nails) from the tire.
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
Deflated Tire:
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in
Service Kit.
Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the
OFF position. NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the park-
ing brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
4. Set the parking brake.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
Mode position.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap tire.
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 419
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn On the Tire operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
Service Kit. indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3). 7
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
Tire Service Kit. pressure within 15 minutes:
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
use. Call for assistance. the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6). inflation pressure before continuing.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
Hose (6): least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). Kit.
420 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
WARNING!
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve- Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
hicle.” the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
CAUTION! to you, your passengers, and others around you.
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get (E) After Driving:
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop to
the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Mode position.
Kit components which may cause permanent damage
to the kit. 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
(D) Drive Vehicle: 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 421
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit using the Tire Service Kit.
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening. 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation 2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended recessed area under the sealant bottle. 7
inflation pressure before continuing.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 accordingly.
Volt outlet.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the housing.
vehicle.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An
service center. audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked
into place.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
422 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of
CAUTION!
the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on the bottom of the air pump). Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
vehicle.
or electrical system may occur.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
Preparations For Jump-Start
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump- engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protec-
follow the procedures in this section carefully. tive cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow battery post.
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 423

WARNING! (Continued)
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission

into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
7
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
Positive Battery Post the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
WARNING! parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever WARNING!

the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
blades. establish a ground connection and personal injury
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch could result.
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.

(Continued)
424 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jump Starting Procedure 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
WARNING! the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to WARNING!
battery explosion.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
CAUTION! of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
Failure to follow these procedures could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle not use any other exposed metal parts.
or the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
Connecting The Jumper Cables battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper the reverse sequence:
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
negative (-) post of the booster battery. the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 425
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the filler door emergency release.
discharged battery.
1. Open the liftgate.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in- 2. Remove access door located on right interior trim panel
spected at your authorized dealer. for release cable with the tip of your key.

CAUTION!
7
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

Fuel Door Release Location

426 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Grab the release cable tether and pull up to release the
CAUTION!
fuel filler door.
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
Fuel Door Released turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
potential for overheating your engine by taking the appro- high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
priate action. to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
• On the highways — slow down. engine cooling system.

• In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in

NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 427
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into the
WARNING!
gear selector override access hole (at the right front
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine corner of the gear selector assembly), and push and hold
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you the override release lever down.
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can 7
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector: wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
1. Turn the engine OFF. wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE,
2. Apply the parking brake. while gently pressing the accelerator.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
the shifter bezel and boot assembly from the center achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
console. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. than two seconds, you must push the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
428 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
CAUTION!
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine. • Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
WARNING! engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
DRIVE/ 2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
damage may result.
matter what the speed.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
NOTE: Push the “ESC Off” switch (if necessary), to place may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
Brake Control System” in “Safety” for further information. sion shifting occurring).
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch
again to restore “ESC On” mode.
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 429
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmis-
sion and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may
also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in
the “Starting And Operating” section.

4X4 MODELS
Towing Condition Wheels OFF FWD 1–SPEED 2–SPEED
The Ground MODELS POWER TRANSFER POWER TRANSFER UNIT
UNIT 7
Flat Tow NONE NOT NOT ALLOWED See instructions under
ALLOWED “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Power Transfer Unit in
NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Rear NOT AL- NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Tow LOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST OK BEST METHOD
METHOD
430 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are towing this
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manually disable the Electric Park Brake each time the
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man- driver’s door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main then releasing the EPB.
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section
under tow must be observed.
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK so
NOTE: that the vehicle can be moved.
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent
CAUTION!
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake • Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer program- Vehicle damage may occur.
mable features in the Uconnect Settings. • When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
failure when the electric parking brake (EPB) is engaged, age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels • Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed. remains released, while being towed.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)

while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode. Note that the Safehold feature
will engage the Electric Park Brake whenever the driver’s
door is opened (if the ignition is ON, transmission is not in
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 431
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
CAUTION!
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. • DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on
the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must • Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
raised). towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
released, while being towed. ments can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War- 7
CAUTION!
ranty.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Damage 4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Unit
from improper towing is not covered under the New The manufacturer recommends towing with all four
Vehicle Limited Warranty. wheels OFF the ground.
4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer Unit Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on
OFF the ground. a towing dolly.

Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or

with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a
towing dolly.
432 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If flatbed equipment is not available and the Power Trans- Recovery Strap — If Equipped
fer Unit is operable, vehicles with a 2–speed Power Trans- Your vehicle may be included with a recovery strap.
fer Unit may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL Recovery straps do not act like traditional tow straps,
wheels on the ground), under the following conditions: chains, or winch cables.
• The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEUTRAL (N).
WARNING!
• The transmission must be in PARK.
Recovery straps should only be used in emergencies to
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
rescue stranded vehicles. Only use Recovery straps on
remains released, while being towed.
vehicles that fit within the recommended GVW of your
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operat- recovery strap. Only attach recovery straps to OE
ing” for detailed instructions. recommended anchor points or emergency towing an-
chor points. Never attach to tow ball or vehicle tie
CAUTION! down point, these are not designed for this purpose.
Never attach to vehicle steering, drive train, or any
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
other suspension components. NEVER pull a strap
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
over sharp edges or abrasive surfaces that can damage
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
the recovery strap. NEVER use a damaged strap, it has
towing.
reduced strength. DO NOT attempt to repair straps.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ONLY persons involved in the recovery should be in
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
either vehicle. No passengers. Anyone inside the ve-
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
hicles can be struck by strap recoil, causing serious
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
injury. MOVE bystanders at least 40 ft (12.2 m) from
the recovery area when using the recovery strap.
 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 433
Using Recovery Strap EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
1. Review all warnings and instructions first. This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
2. Position the recovery vehicle. crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
3. Connect the recovery strap. deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
4. Add a recovery damper or blanket.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
5. Clear the danger zone. for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
6. Safely and slowly start pulling.
7. Disconnect the recovery strap after both vehicle are 7
secure and parked.

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Maintenance Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .440 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ 2.4L Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ 3.2L Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 8
▫ Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 䡵 TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 ▫ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 ▫ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 ▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 ▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .450 ▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 ▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents . . . . . . . .492
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .489 ▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
䡵 INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Leather Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Glass Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
䡵 BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437
SCHEDULED SERVICING Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
scheduled maintenance.
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change further information.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
for fleet customers.
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
8
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your Severe Duty All Models
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
miles (805 km).
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
• Check engine oil level. Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregular
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, turns on
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake required
master cylinder, fill as needed. • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights. park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Required Maintenance Intervals.
• Inspect exhaust system
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
required maintenance intervals. off-road conditions
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 439
Maintenance Plan

100,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000
110,000
20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000
112,000
32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000
Or Kilometers:

Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends,
X X X X X X X
and replace if necessary.
8
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pul-
X
ley, and replace if necessary.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs ** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
X X
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
440 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
WARNING!
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
• You can be badly injured working on or around a is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 441
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.4L Compartment

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Battery

2 — Oil Fill Cap 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
442 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3.2L Compartment

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

2 — Oil Filter Access Cover 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 9 — Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Battery
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 443
Checking Oil Level
CAUTION!
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully engine.
warmed up engine is shut off.
Adding Washer Fluid
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
The windshield and rear window washers share the same
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front of
There are three possible dipstick types, the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in
the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
• Crosshatched zone.
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the 8
residual water.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
markings on the dipstick.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
high end of the range marking.
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
444 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Commercially available windshield washer solvents • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
must be exercised when filling or working around the battery or any other booster source with an output
washer solution. greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Maintenance-Free Battery • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
handling.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
CAUTION!
WARNING! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can battery that the positive cable is attached to the
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting posts and free of corrosion.
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
information. vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
(Continued) “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 445
DEALER SERVICE NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
for fleet customers.
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any Gasoline Engine Oil Selection
procedure yourself.
For best performance and maximum protection under all
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys- types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil ommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
penalties being assessed against you. requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
WARNING! Identification Symbol 8
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you This symbol means that the oil has
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you been certified by the American Pe-
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service troleum Institute (API). The manu-
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
Engine Oil
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the oils.
proper maintenance intervals.
446 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also shows
CAUTION!
the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not “Engine Compartment” in this section.
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva- Synthetic Engine Oils
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
fuel economy. mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended followed.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
ment” in this section. number should not be used.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi- Materials Added To Engine Oil
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
should not be used.
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.2L Engine engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Shell Helix is recommended for all operating temperatures.
This engine oil improves low temperature starting and
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 447
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the WARNING!
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service sta- The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
tion or governmental agency for advice on how and where provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
Engine Oil Filter cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
every engine oil change. hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
Engine Oil Filter Selection etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury. 8
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
and are recommended. assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the Replacement
proper maintenance intervals.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you
find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change
your air cleaner filter.
448 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal 2. Push in on the quick connect clip with your thumb and
remove by pulling hose (If Equipped) away from air
1. Remove the screws from the air cleaner cover.
cleaner filter cover.

Air Cleaner Filter Cover

Air Cleaner Air Hose — If Equipped
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose (If Equipped) 1 — Air Filter Cleaner Cover
3 — Screws 2 — Air Hose (If Equipped)
3 — Quick Connect Clip
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 449
3. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter. 4. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing
assembly.

8
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter 1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
450 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
WARNING! (Continued)
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is • You can be badly injured working on or around a
present before replacing the air filter element. motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
facing downward. service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly
locating tabs. When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
3. Install screws to secure the air cleaner cover to the
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
housing assembly and install air hose (if equipped).
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
WARNING! wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.

• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt

with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.

(Continued)
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 451
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.

Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)

Air Conditioner Maintenance
8
Conditions that would require replacement: For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt start of each warm season. This service should include
body) cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
• Rib or belt wear Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
452 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
WARNING!
Equipped
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap- R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam- manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap- performed by an authorized dealer or other service facili-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys- ties using recovery and recycling equipment.
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
information kit, for further warranty information. compressor oil and refrigerants.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un- Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
done by an experienced technician. Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be performed by
CAUTION! authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition- PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 453
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter) 2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.

The A/C air filter is located in front of the evaporator on

the lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter: 8
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover.
Console Closeout Panel
454 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Pull down the passenger hush panel under the dash
panel

Air Filter Cover Location

5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
Hush Panel the housing. Take note of the air filter position indica-
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the tors.
top of the door to release the cover then rotate the door
out and lift up.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 455
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
A/C Air Filter and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
8
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
CAUTION!
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
properly install the filter will result in the need to Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
replace it more often.

7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash

panel and console closeout.
456 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Windshield Wiper Blades The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
are experienced. This inspection should include the follow-
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
ing points:
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film. • Wear or uneven edges
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may • Foreign material
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a • Hardening or cracking
dry windshield. • Deformation or fatigue
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, CAUTION!
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 457
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position. up the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding
the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade
down towards the base of the wiper arm.

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position

1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3 — Wiper Arm 1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
458 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper Installing The Front Wipers
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the
in the full up position.
wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade
toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
blade from the wiper arm). wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade
side of the wiper facing up and away from the wind-
shield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm
and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the
wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it
into its locked position. Latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.

Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1 — Wiper Blade 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
2 — Wiper Arm allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
3 — Release Tab

4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.

 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 459
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.

Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position 8

1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade

3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp

Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
with your right hand. With your left hand hold the
2 — Wiper Arm wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the
wiper arm.
460 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible Installing The Rear Wiper
snap.
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
to disengage.
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the
end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper
arm with one hand, and apply pressure on the wiper
blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm Exhaust System
1 — Wiper Blade The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Arm Receptacle system.

5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 461
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
CAUTION!
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex- fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam- ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or and may seriously reduce engine performance and
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into cause serious damage to the engine.
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri- vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
cation or oil change. Replace as required. the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
WARNING! mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe 8
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
vehicle.
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
materials that can burn. Such materials might be keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
can burn. tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
462 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
WARNING! (Continued)
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
should be obtained immediately. the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage: Engine Coolant Checks
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
motion. cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
vehicle. coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumula-
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires tion of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle condenser.
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
Cooling System cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
WARNING! system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you

(Continued)
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 463
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
CAUTION! (Continued)
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
be added to the system please contact your local autho- freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
rized dealer. freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032). and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the sible.
proper maintenance intervals. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional 8
Selection Of Coolant
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
tions” for further information.
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
CAUTION! propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- freeze) is not recommended.
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic

(Continued)
464 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Adding Coolant • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
cooling system.
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the proper level of protection against freezing according to
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. operated.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic NOTE:
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 to be added to the system, please contact your local
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic authorized dealer.
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) sible.
are anticipated.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 465
Cooling System Pressure Cap your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills imme-
recovery tank.
diately.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
Coolant Level
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
WARNING! determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over- indicated on the bottle.
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an 8
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point
hot or under pressure. or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci- As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
damage may result. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
466 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Points To Remember • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
ponents.
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti- hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
freeze) to enter the radiator. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be condenser clean.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing. Brake System
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
for leaks. to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 467

WARNING! WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi- • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake Specifications” for further information. Using the
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake damage. You would not have your full braking brake system and/or impair its performance. The
capacity in an emergency. proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder master cylinder reservoir.
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin- 8
bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the a open container absorbs moisture from the air
master cylinder area before removing cap. With disc resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low, check system result in a collision.
for leaks. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica- brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
tions” for further information. painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.

(Continued)
468 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
This could result in a collision. shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni-
cal Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant Special Additives
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” mance may be impaired by supplemental additives. There-
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the fore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom- Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
mended fluid. affect seals.

NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans- CAUTION!

mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 469
Fluid Level Check Fluid And Filter Changes
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmis- of the vehicle.
sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmis-
sembled for any reason.
sion fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe transmission dam- RAISING THE VEHICLE
age.
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
CAUTION! an authorized dealer or service station. 8

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho- TIRES

rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage Tire Safety Information
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately. Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
470 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Markings NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
Tire Markings “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
Temperature Grades tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 471
Tire Identification Number (TIN) the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) 8
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
472 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 473
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) 8

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

474 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat-
ing” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs,
vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Load-
Tire And Loading Information Placard
ing” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this
manual.
This placard tells you important information about the:
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
• Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
• Total weight your vehicle can carry. occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
• Tire size designed for your vehicle.
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
• Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
tires. weight referenced here.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 475
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit— this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or Metric Example For Load Limit
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. NOTE:
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb table shows examples on how to calculate total load, 8
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 with varying seating configurations and number and
(5x150) = 650 lbs.) size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
carry capacity of your vehicle.
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load • For the following example, the combined weight of
capacity calculated in Step 4. occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
476 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tires — General Information

WARNING!
Tire Pressure
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec- satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over- are affected by improper tire pressure:
load them. • Safety and Vehicle Stability
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 477
• Economy Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
• Tread Wear
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
• Ride Comfort
NOTE:
Safety
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
WARNING!
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can vehicle to drift left or right.
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result Fuel Economy
in overheating and tire failure. Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion resulting in higher fuel consumption. 8
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure. Tread Wear
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
vehicle control. for earlier tire replacement.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
478 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Inflation Pressures cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
At least once a month: of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
may look properly inflated even when they are under- when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
inflated. the Winter.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
CAUTION!
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always temperature condition.
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
damage the valve stem. build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 479
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to Tire Repair
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
the following criteria:
and cold tire inflation pressures.
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
WARNING! • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum (sidewall damage is not repairable).
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could • The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
Radial Ply Tires 8
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
WARNING!
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
with other types of tires. pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
480 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Tread Wear Indicators
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
mode. help you in determining when your tires should be re-
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa- placed.
tion.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or Tire Tread
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
1 — Worn Tire
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph 2 — New Tire
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 481
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
WARNING!
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
further information. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
Life Of Tire serious injury or death.

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
including, but not limited to: exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style.
Replacement Tires
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many 8
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
• Distance driven. to the originals in size, quality and performance when
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
schedule is highly recommended. Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
482 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
WARNING! (Continued)
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect ratings approved for your vehicle.
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the other than what was originally equipped on your
original wheels. vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may control and have a collision.
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. failure and loss of vehicle control.

WARNING! CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
rating other than that specified for your vehicle. may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels ings.
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering

(Continued)
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 483
Tire Types
WARNING!
All Season Tires — If Equipped
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be- death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be possibility of loss of vehicle control.
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure Snow Tires
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
your vehicle. during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi- If you need snow tires, select tires
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. equivalent in size and type to the origi- 8
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving in sets of four; failure to do so may
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am- adversely affect the safety and handling
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are of your vehicle.
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
authorized dealer.
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
484 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud- pattern.
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
using these tire types.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
Spare Tires — If Equipped You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
Of Emergency” for further information. side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
CAUTION! preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
Damage to the vehicle may result. tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
on the vehicle at any given time.
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 485
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
WARNING!
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result WARNING!
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
Full Size Spare — If Equipped lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. 8
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
control.
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
486 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle. brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently dam-
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing. age this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel CAUTION!
surface.
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
CAUTION! metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
These products and automatic car washes may damage lent is recommended.
the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
recommended. cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 487
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
• Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/55R18 tire sizes
CAUTION! are not chainable.
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black • The use of 7 mm snow chains is permitted with the use
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models without
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT • Original equipment 225/65R17 and 225/60R18 tire sizes
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is are not chainable.
required to maintain this finish.
• The use of 9 mm snow chains is permitted with the use
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels. 8
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear- Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models with a
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
damage.
• The use of 7 mm snow chains is permitted with 225/
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as 65R17 and 225/60R18 tires.
recommended by the traction device manufacturer Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models
• Use on Front Tires Only • The use of 9 mm snow chains is permitted with the use
• Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices of 225/65R17 tires on size 17 x 7.5 ET31 wheels.
are recommended:
488 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) • Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable tween tires and other suspension components, it is
handling. You could lose control and have a collision. important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
CAUTION! that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
• Use on Front Tires Only damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models may • Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
result if tire chains or traction devices are used with tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
original equipment size tires. • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Models without • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit may result if tire bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
chains or traction devices are used with original • Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
equipment size tires. ment.
• Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Mod- • Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
els may result if tire chains or traction devices are tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
used with original equipment size tires. and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
following precautions: less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
(Continued)
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 489
Tire Rotation Recommendations The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation method
is the “forward cross” shown in the following diagram.
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
tires that must not be reversed.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte- 8
nance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation

490 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following TIRE QUALITY GRADES
diagram. The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in
each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your
vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
CAUTION! their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices,
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each and differences in road characteristics and climate.
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to Traction Grades
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should
be followed to balance tire wear. The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 491
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
WARNING!
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
WARNING! tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Ex-
cessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading,
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
buildup and possible tire failure.
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
STORING THE VEHICLE
Temperature Grades If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, month, observe the following precautions:
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat • Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy 8
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under con- location the windows open slightly.
trolled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. • Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the • Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive post and be sure that the battery is fully charged. During
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C storage check battery charge quarterly.
corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger • If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle system, check the battery charge every 30 days.
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the • Clean and protect the painted parts by applying protec-
minimum required by law. tive waxes.
492 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven for
protective waxes. at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures”
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper blades
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
and leave raised from the glass.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking care CAUTION!
not to damage the painted surface by dragging across
dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which will not Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
allow the evaporation of moisture present on the surface to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
of the vehicle. switch in the OFF position and close the drivers door.
When reconnecting the positive and negative terminals
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
higher than recommended on the tire placard and check position and the drivers door is closed.
it periodically.
• Do not drain the engine cooling system. BODYWORK

• Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary for two Protection From Atmospheric Agents
weeks or more, run idle the engine for approximately Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
five minutes, with the air conditioning system on and graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
high fan speed. This will ensure a proper lubrication of passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
the system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage to trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
the compressor when the vehicle is put back into opera- corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
tion. which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 493
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec- different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
tion.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
The following maintenance recommendations will enable reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis- remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
tance built into your vehicle. by rinsing.
What Causes Corrosion? Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
and protective coatings from your vehicle. Preserving The Bodywork
The most common causes are: Washing
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle 8
• Stone and gravel impact. in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities. on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Remover to remove.
Body And Underbody Maintenance • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
Cleaning Headlights paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
than glass headlights.
494 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
CAUTION!
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such packaged and sealed.
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
metal and painted surfaces. or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. • Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Special Care
INTERIORS
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a Seats And Fabric Parts
month. Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of carpeting.
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open. WARNING!
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
considered the responsibility of the owner. areas they may cause respiratory harm.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
Seat Belt Maintenance
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
owner. damage can also weaken the fabric.
 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 495
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
CAUTION!
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. • Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,sun-
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the tan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted,
buckles do not work properly. or decoratedsurfaces of the interior may cause per-
manent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may notbe
WARNING!
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. 8
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
Plastic And Coated Parts cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
496 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Leather Parts
CAUTION!
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery. Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular damage to the seat may result.
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and Glass Surfaces
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR
MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
that may scratch the elements.
maintain the original condition.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer directly on the mirror.
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed to for
easy cleaning, and FCA recommends MOPAR total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats
as needed.
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .498 䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .499
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 9
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles. . . . . . . . .502
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .502
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
498 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. The
VIN number also is stamped into the right front body, on
the right front seat cross member. With the seat in the rear
most position a flap in the carpet can be cut open and lifted
to reveal the VIN. It also appears on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side of
the engine block. Vehicle Identification Number
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 499
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench.
Right Front Body VIN Location
Torque Specifications
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
9
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/
BRAKE SYSTEM
Bolt Size Bolt
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys- Socket
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal Size
capability, the remaining system will still function. How- 100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.25 19 mm
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli- **Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light.”
500 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
Wheel Mounting Surface sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each the wheel.
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 501
FUEL REQUIREMENTS Reformulated Gasoline
2.4L and 3.2L Engines Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning
gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformu-
These engines are designed to meet all
lated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically
emissions regulations and provide opti-
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
mum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
“Regular” gasoline having a posted oc- erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
tane number of 87 as specified by the performance and durability of engine and fuel system
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher components.
octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines. Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a 9
CAUTION!
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
Vehicle Limited Warranty. damage critical fuel system components, cause emis-
sions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please ob-
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
serve pump labels as they should clearly communicate if
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
ing service for the vehicle.
502 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War- damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
ranty. nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher MMT In Gasoline
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited War- Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
ranty. a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
• Operate in a lean mode.
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
• Poor engine performance.
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
• Poor cold start and cold drivability. gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 503
Materials Added To Fuel Fuel System Cautions
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and CAUTION!
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
have these additives will help improve fuel economy, performance:
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso- law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
line contains a higher level of detergents mance and damage the emissions control system.
to further aide in minimizing engine • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
and fuel system deposits. When avail- malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
able, the usage of Top Tier Detergent overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
gasoline is recommended. Visit some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. 9
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
phragm materials.
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
504 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against EQUIPPED
you.
E-85 General Information
Carbon Monoxide Warnings The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
WARNING! fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon- other sections of this manual for information on features
oxide poisoning: that are common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon Fuel powered vehicles.
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a CAUTION!
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main- E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every unleaded gasoline.
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 505
NOTE:
WARNING!
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking rough idle following start up may be experienced even if
materials lit or products that can cause spark in or near the above recommendations are followed, especially
the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning
agent and never use it near an open flame. • Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
Fuel Requirements engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline addi-
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85 tive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels. be used.

For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating be- Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles 9
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types: FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated
engine oils. These special requirements are included in
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling. MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least US Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that
5 miles (8 km). engine oils that are API Certified and meet the require-
ments of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard start- contains additional requirements, developed during exten-
ing and/or driveability problems during warm up. sive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to FCA
US LLC engines.
506 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Starting Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time it Ethanol compatible service components are required.
takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a
deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until CAUTION!
the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel. Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the Maintenance
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
CAUTION!

Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experi- vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may
enced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and affect drivability.
the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%,
compared to gasoline operation.
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 507
FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.2L Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Certified)
3.2 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Certified)
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/ 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
9
Formula)
3.2 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/ 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
508 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Tech-
nology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA
Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 3.2L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engines 87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L and 3.2L Engines 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 509

CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos- 9
sible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
510 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE
J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
 MULTIMEDIA

CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .555
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 ▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .555
䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal Settings
— Uconnect 5.0 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 ▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
10
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal Settings ▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
— Uconnect 8.4 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
䡵 MEDIA HUB — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
512 MULTIMEDIA
▫ Register (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 ▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 ▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 ▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV). . . . . . . . . .569
 MULTIMEDIA 513
UCONNECT RADIOS 1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App screen.
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on
the main menu bar.
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow CYBERSECURITY
these steps: Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. 10
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.

Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu

514 MULTIMEDIA
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your NOTE:
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
regarding software updates.
installed.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
WARNING! the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
update to learn about available Uconnect software
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
updates.
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may • Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
result in an accident involving serious injury or personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
death. Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media mation and private communications without your consent.
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices - If
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 Radio” in your Uconnect
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic
breached. System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav- Instrument Panel”.
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
 MULTIMEDIA 515
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features.
NOTE: Features can vary by vehicle.

Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And

Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 10
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons

On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
516 MULTIMEDIA
Buttons On The Faceplate Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect Settings — Uconnect 5.0 Settings
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, Push the SETTINGS or the MORE button on the faceplate,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right then the “Settings” button on the touchscreen (if equipped)
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument to display the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and Uconnect system allows you to access programmable fea-
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the tures that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock &
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting Date, Safety & Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
(i.e., ON, OFF). Comfort, Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio,
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Back Phone/Bluetooth, Sirius Setup, Restore Settings, and Clear
buttons located below the Uconnect system. Personal Data, Brakes and System Information.

Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
turn the touchscreen on. screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
option on the Uconnect system. your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Buttons On The Touchscreen Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of
display. the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available settings.
 MULTIMEDIA 517
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Display Mode Manual Auto
Display Brightness With + -
Headlights ON
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With + -
Headlights OFF
NOTE: 10
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Language
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español)
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Lan-
guage” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
518 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options

Units US Metric
Touchscreen Beep
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the in-
strument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Control Screen Time-Out —
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
 MULTIMEDIA 519
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Set Time and Format 12 hour 24 hour AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the
correct time.
Set Date Up Arrow Down Arrow
NOTE:
Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date.

10
520 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Forward Collision Warn- Near Far
ing (FCW) — If Equipped
NOTE:
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the Far
setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving experience, select the
Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you.
Forward Collision Warn- Far Med Near
ing (FCW) Active Braking
— If Equipped
NOTE:
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision. The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver
requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at 5 mph
(8 km/h).
 MULTIMEDIA 521

Setting Name Selectable Options

LaneSense Warning — If Early Medium Late
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Warning“ feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feed-
back for potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late”
warning zone start point.
LaneSense Strength — If Low Medium High
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Strength” feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential
lane departures.

10
522 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options

ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the gear selector is in REVERSE and the
vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h).
Front ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
— If Equipped
Rear ParkSense Volume — Low Medium High
If Equipped
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located be-
hind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — On Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ig-
nition is in the RUN position and the gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
 MULTIMEDIA 523

Setting Name Selectable Options

Blind Spot Alert — If Off Lights Lights and Chime
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sen-
sor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guide Lines — If
Equipped
ParkView Backup Camera
Fixed Guide Lines — If 10
Equipped
ParkView Backup Camera Enable Disable
Delay
NOTE:
When the “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView Backup Camera display to
remain on while in drive for up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
524 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options

Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
Electric Park Brake Service
Mode
NOTE:
The “Electric Park Brake Service Mode “ feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a ve-
hicle integrated, menu driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation
brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
 MULTIMEDIA 525

Setting Name Selectable Options

Headlights With
Wipers — If
Equipped
Headlight Illumina- 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
tion On Approach
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Auto High Beam — On Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto High Beams” is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under cer-
tain conditions.
10
Daytime Running Yes No
Lights
Flash Lights With On Off
Lock
526 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Door Locks” feature locks all doors automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the trans-
mission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Horn With Lock On Off
Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
Passive Entry On Off
Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock Driver All
NOTE:
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button, you must
push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will unlock
on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s
door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver
door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
 MULTIMEDIA 527

Setting Name Selectable Options

Memory Linked To FOB — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Memory Linked To FOB” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s
seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering
and exiting the vehicle.
Power Liftgate Alert — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Power Liftgate Alert” feature plays an alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Auto-On Driver Heated/ Off Remote Start All Starts 10
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn
on.
528 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Easy Exit Seat — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Engine Off Power 0 sec 45 sec 5 minutes 10 minutes
Delay — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay + -
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
 MULTIMEDIA 529
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the compass variance zone should be set for best results.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Compass Variance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
NOTE:
When the “Compass Variance” feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to
15 per the compass variance zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
ences, the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most
accurate compass headings.
Compass Calibra- Yes
tion
10
NOTE:
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“Yes” button on the touchscreen and complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or me-
tallic objects). A message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This
is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false
readings.
530 MULTIMEDIA

Compass Variance Zone Map

Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Adjustable Options

Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with
the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the
setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
 MULTIMEDIA 531

Setting Name Adjustable Options

Balance/Fade Up Arrow Down Ar- Left Arrow Right Ar- Center “C”
Button row Button Button row Button Button
NOTE:
When in the “Balance/Fade” display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button
on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center
‘C’ Button” on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Loudness — If Equipped Yes No
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped On Off
10
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input
532 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Paired Phones List Of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Paired Audio Sources List Of Paired Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Audio Sources” feature shows which Audio Sources are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For fur-
ther information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
 MULTIMEDIA 533
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
10
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
534 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
 MULTIMEDIA 535
Customer Programmable Features/Personal To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
Settings — Uconnect 8.4 Personal Settings desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
Press the “Apps” or the “Controls” button on the touch- press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
screen, then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access programmable fea- Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow button
tures that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press
Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/ screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
Data, and System Information. through the list of available settings.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.

10
536 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Display Mode Day Night Auto
Display Brightness With + -
Headlights ON
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With + -
Headlights OFF
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection,
press the ⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark ap-
pears showing that the setting has been selected.
 MULTIMEDIA 537

Setting Name Selectable Options

Set Language
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Espa-
ñol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep
Control Screen Time-Out —
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In 10
Cluster — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the in-
strument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
538 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Sync Time With GPS
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped
 MULTIMEDIA 539
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Forward Collision Warn- Near Far
ing (FCW) — If Equipped
NOTE:
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the
Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are
farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving experience,
select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of
you.
Forward Collision Warn- Far Med Near
ing (FCW) Active Braking
— If Equipped
10
NOTE:
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision. The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver
requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at 5 mph
(8 km/h).
540 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options

LaneSense Warning — If Early Medium Late
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Warning” feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feed-
back for potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late”
warning zone start point.
LaneSense Strength — If Low Medium High
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “LaneSense Strength” feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential
lane departures.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the gear selector is in REVERSE and the
vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h).
 MULTIMEDIA 541

Setting Name Selectable Options

Front ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
— If Equipped
Rear ParkSense Volume — Low Medium High
If Equipped
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located be-
hind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — On Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ig- 10
nition is in the RUN position and the gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
542 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options

Blind Spot Alert — If Off Lights Lights and Chime
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sen-
sor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guide Lines — If
Equipped
ParkView Backup Camera
Fixed Guide Lines — If
Equipped
ParkView Backup Camera Enable Disable
Delay
NOTE:
When the “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView Backup Camera display to
remain on while in drive for up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
 MULTIMEDIA 543

Setting Name Selectable Options

Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
Electric Park Brake Service
Mode
NOTE:
The “Electric Park Brake Service Mode” feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle
integrated, menu driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes
(brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE: 10
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
544 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options

Headlights With
Wipers — If
Equipped
Headlight Illumi- 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
nated On Approach
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Auto Dim High On Off
Beams— If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automati-
cally under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Yes No
Lights — If
Equipped
Flash Lights With On Off
Lock
 MULTIMEDIA 545
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.

10
546 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name Selectable Options

Flash Lights With Lock
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks”, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks”, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key
fob unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors,” all doors will unlock no
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s
door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can
be used to unlock all doors (or use the key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons.
 MULTIMEDIA 547

Setting Name Selectable Options

Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory loca-
tion (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Power Lift Gate Chime — If Equipped
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Auto-On Driver Heated/ Off Remote Start All Starts
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start 10
— If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected, the driv-
er’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
548 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Easy Exit Seat — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Engine Off Power 0 sec 45 sec 5 minutes 10 minutes
Delay — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay + -
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
 MULTIMEDIA 549
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in the “Balance/Fade” display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the
“Speaker Icon” toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with
the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the
setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3 10
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input
Loudness — If Equipped
550 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Paired Phones List Of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Paired Audio Sources List Of Paired Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Audio Sources” feature shows which Audio Sources are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For fur-
ther information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
 MULTIMEDIA 551
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using
one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you
will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
10
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
552 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

System Information Displays system information screen with software version.
 MULTIMEDIA 553
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
EQUIPPED between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/CD/
AUX, etc.).
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-
access the switches. button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- 10
grammed in the radio preset button.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
554 MULTIMEDIA
CD Player MEDIA HUB — IF EQUIPPED
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go
to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the player.

Media Hub
1 — USB Port
2 — SD Card Slot
3 — AUX Jack

Located in the front storage area, this feature allows an

External USB device, SD card or AUX electronic device to
be plugged into the port, slot or jack.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
 MULTIMEDIA 555
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
before turning on the wireless radio.
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
using Uconnect (if equipped). with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Regulatory And Safety Information
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation 2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is tion. 10
far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nev-
ertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
556 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply Introducing Uconnect
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer- you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or 8.4/8.4
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener- NAV system.
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
Uconnect 5.0
2. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
 MULTIMEDIA 557
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conver-
sations are examples of noise that may impact recogni-
tion.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button, 10
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
8.4 system. by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
558 MULTIMEDIA
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.

Uconnect Voice Command Buttons

1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4/8.4 NAV Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 — Push To End Call

Basic Voice Commands Uconnect 5.0

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ
 MULTIMEDIA 559
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.

Uconnect 8.4 /8.4 NAV 10

Radio Uconnect 5.0 Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
560 MULTIMEDIA
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.

Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio

Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD
player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
Uconnect 5.0 Media
your media source or choose an artist.
 MULTIMEDIA 561
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”

Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media 10

Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
following commandsѧ
562 MULTIMEDIA
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
Start without
No. I’ll be late.
me.
Okay. Where are you? I will be
Are you there <number>
Call me. minutes late.
yet?
I need See you in
I’ll call you later.
directions. <number> of
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right minutes.
I’m lost. now. Thanks.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone
Voice Text Reply TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the
this feature. For details about MAP, visit
Phone button and say Listen. (Must have compatible
UconnectPhone.com.
mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
Phone button . After the beep, say: “Reply.”
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
 MULTIMEDIA 563
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
iPhone Notification Settings Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
1 — Select “Settings” steering wheel if equipped.
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications” 10

TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if

your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
564 MULTIMEDIA
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button . After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”

Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate

Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to activate navigation
at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation
beep, say:
 MULTIMEDIA 565
Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV) Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
WARNING!
Remote Horn and Lights
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 Yelp Search
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable Voice Texting
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
Roadside Assistance Call
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho- 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot***
rized by the subscriber. **If vehicle is equipped.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take ***Extra charges apply.
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access, Register (8.4/8.4 NAV)
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
the next page. 10
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
566 MULTIMEDIA
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.

Assist Button
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your ve-
hicle and handle all of the details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
press the “Apps ” button on the touchscreen to
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com. Mobile App
 MULTIMEDIA 567
To link your internet radio accounts: Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV)
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile 1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After the
device. beep, say the following command: “Send message to
John Smith.”
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app. 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message
you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to process
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
your message.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
press Link.
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth, pair hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
your phone and select the Via Mobile app you want to what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with
play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream your your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
personalized music. You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
NOTE: compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about 10
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links). Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text
messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
• Once you download the app to your compatible mobile iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
device, you will also be able to start your vehicle and
lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.
568 MULTIMEDIA
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps ” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen,
push the VR button , then say: “YELP search.”
iPhone Notification Settings
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
1 — Select “Settings”
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like Uconnect
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle to find.
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Dis-
TIP: tance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if your
vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
 MULTIMEDIA 569
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.

Yelp 10
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not
available for 8.4 system or vehicles sold in the Canadian
market.)
SiriusXM Travel Link
570 MULTIMEDIA
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages and many
other useful requests.

Siri Eyes Free Available

 MULTIMEDIA 571
Getting Started 1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound
system. Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone.
Supplement for a detailed pairing procedure.

Siri Enable Screens

1 — Select Settings on your 3 — Select Siri 10
iPhone 4 — Enable Siri Voice Recognition/Siri Buttons
2 — Select General 1 — Phone Pick up Button
2 — Voice Recognition/Siri Eyes Free Button
3 — Phone Hang Up Button

NOTE: A push and release of the button will start

normal embedded VR functions. The push and hold,
then release of the button will start Siri functions.
572 MULTIMEDIA
2. After the double beep, begin speaking to Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and questions:
• ⬙Play Rolling Stones⬙
• ⬙Send text message to John⬙
• ⬙Read text message from Sarah⬙
• ⬙Take me to the nearest coffee shop⬙
NOTE:
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead to ensure your command is
understood.
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later.

Siri Eyes Free

Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
 MULTIMEDIA 573
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text mes- General Information
sage, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
send it to voicemail. Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
Automatic reply messages can be: conditions:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters. 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
sired operation.
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
NOTE:
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
so you can still place a second call without being inter- FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
rupted by incoming calls. pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
NOTE:
device. 10
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
• Auto reply with text message is only available on only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP. tions were met.
574 MULTIMEDIA
Additional Information 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trade- too high.
marks of Yelp.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
For Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com. removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241 have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you considering disc player service.
call.

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .579
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .577 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
11
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .577
576 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
YOUR VEHICLE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare For The Appointment interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
can often provide a clue to the current problem. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
Prepare A List
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the timely manner.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service advisor know. service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
Be Reasonable With Requests
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
If you list a number of items and you must have your general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the They want to know if you need assistance.
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 577
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center Mexico, D. F.
should include the following information: In Mexico City: 5081-7568
• Owner’s name and address
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
• Authorized dealer name
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
P.O. Box 191857
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
San Juan 00919-1857
FCA US LLC Customer Center
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
P.O. Box 21–8004
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Phone: (800) 247-9753 Impaired (TDD/TTY)
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
P.O. Box 1621 manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. 11
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
In Mexico Contact dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
578 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
Relay Service operator. ments.
Service Contract We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
concerns.
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
WARNING!
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur- Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800- some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
(800) 387-9983 French). California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con- reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not tained in vehicles and certain products of component
responsible for any service contract other than the manu- wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and reproductive harm.
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 579
WARRANTY INFORMATION To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located in the
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
owner’s information kit, for the terms and provisions of
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other infor-
market.
mation about motor vehicle safety from http://
MOPAR PARTS www.safercar.gov.
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail- In Canada
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at should contact the Customer Service Department immedi-
its best. ately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could roadsafety/.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should imme-
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
diately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- 11
istration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC. To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy form.
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized dealer NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manu-
or FCA US LLC. als (no P.O. Boxes).
580 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Service Manuals Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor- These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain- you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
and/or components is written in straightforward language
Call toll free at:
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals Or
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems • www.techauthority.com
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
INDEX

12
582 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .286 Alarm
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 140
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212, 216 All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . .229, 433 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463, 507
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213, 216 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Audio Systems (Radio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Air Bag Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 212, 248 Automatic Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .447 Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 453 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264, 469
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 452 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 451 Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
 INDEX 583
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468, 469 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .113 Caps, Filler
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356, 425
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 442, 446
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 444 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 504
Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Cargo Tie-Downs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Brake Control System, Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 469
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466, 499 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .163 12
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Child Restraints
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
584 INDEX
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .241 Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 465
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .236 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .233 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . .463, 507
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Cleaning Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158, 159, 160, 162
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Defroster, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Dipsticks
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Disposal
 INDEX 585
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 442
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 145 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 145 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 504
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .113 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 507
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 442, 446
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 507
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . .283, 286 Engine Oil Viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . . .143 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . .229, 433
Emergency, In Case Of Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 504 12
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 504
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 469 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 460
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 250
Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .163
586 INDEX
Filters Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Forward Collision Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90, 453 Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Fuel
Flashers Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 157, 250 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501, 504
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Flexible Fuel Vehicles Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504, 505 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Fuel, Flexible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . .103, 107
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Fluid Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Fluid Level Checks Gear Select Lever Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Gross Axle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
 INDEX 587
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 57, 383
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 154, 157
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . .64 Instrument Cluster Display
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . . . .64 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 407, 469
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 12
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Hitches Key Fob
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .23, 31
588 INDEX
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .21 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . .23 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158, 159, 160, 162
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 64
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Key, Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 31 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
LaneSense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 101 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .146
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 212, 248 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156, 157
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
 INDEX 589
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .146, 163
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . .148, 192 Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 157, 250 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 113 Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .142, 157 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Loading Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Load Shed Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 57, 383
Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 113
Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 MOPAR Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Locks Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Low Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 12
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
590 INDEX
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . .473
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Power
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445, 507 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446, 507 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Pretensioners
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Radio Frequency
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 30, 31, 39
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . .5, 579 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306, 313 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306, 313
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
 INDEX 591
Rear Window Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Shifting Into Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) . . . .373 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . .373 Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Shifting Out Of Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) . .375 Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . .375 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Remote Control Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Remote Keyless Entry Schedule, Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Seat Belt
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .205
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .23, 31 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . .208, 209
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . . . .553 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Remote Starting Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 12
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . .29, 527 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 527 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 31 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
592 INDEX
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 140
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199, 248 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .205 Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Sentry Key
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199, 201, 203 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 31
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Shifting
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Power Transfer Unit, Shifting Into Power Transfer
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Unit Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373, 375
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 50 Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 41 Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 44 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 157, 250
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570, 571
 INDEX 593
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484, 485 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . .283, 286 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Tire And Loading Information Placard. . . . . . . . . . . .473
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250, 476, 484, 490
Steering Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 469
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 484
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .553 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 12
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 469
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473, 474
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . . .213 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
594 INDEX
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363, 364
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469, 476 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484, 485 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264, 468
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Tire Service Kit. . . . . . . . . . . .414, 415, 416, 418, 420, 421 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . .103
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 157
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359, 363, 429
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Uconnect
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . .29, 527
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 527
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572, 574
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Uconnect Access
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Uconnect Settings
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
 INDEX 595
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Universal Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 113 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 443
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357, 474 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .32 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Wiper Blade Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Wireless Charging Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 443
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 12
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Windows
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
normal may require special precautions.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
 2017 Cherokee
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®

17KL74-126-AB
2017
OWNER’S MANUAL
Cherokee
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Second Edition
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Printed in U.S.A.